AR150 Service

AR-F151
CODE: 00ZARF151/A1E
DIGITAL COPIER
AR-150
AR-155
(AR-F151) MODEL AR-F151
CONTENTS
[ 1 ] GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
[ 2 ] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
[ 3 ] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
[ 4 ] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES . . . 4 - 1
[ 5 ] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
[ 6 ] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
[ 7 ] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
[ 8 ] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
[ 9 ] SIMULATION, FAX SOFTWARE SWITCH,
TROUBLE CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
[10] USER PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1
[12] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1
Parts marked with “ ” are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with specified
ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
This document has been published to be used

SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
AR-F151
CAUTION
This product is a class 1 laser product that complies with 21CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11 of the CDRH stand-
ard and IEC825. This means that this machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation. The use of
controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in haz-
ardous radiation exposure.
This laser radiation is not a danger to the skin, but when an exact focusing of the laser beam is achieved
on the eye’s retina, there is the danger of spot damage to the retina.
The following cautions must be observed to avoid exposure of the laser beam to your eyes at the time
of servicing.
1) When a problem in the laser optical unit has occurred, the whole optical unit must be exchanged as
a unit, not as individual parts.
2) Do not look into the machine with the main switch turned on after removing the developer unit, toner
cartridge, and drum cartridge.
3) Do not look into the laser beam exposure slit of the laser optical unit with the connector connected
when removing and installing the optical system.
4) The middle frame contains the safety interlock switch.
Do not defeat the safety interlock by inserting wedges or other items into the switch slot.
CAUTION VARO !
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION, AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS
WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED. OHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA
NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE ÄLÄ
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
KATSO SÄTEESEEN.
VORSICHT ADVARSEL
UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG, USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING VED ÅBNING, NÅR
WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET UND SIKKERHEDSBRYDERE ER UDE AF
SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG ÜBERBRÜCKT. FUNKTION. UNDGÅ UDSAETTELSE FOR
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN. STRÅLNING.
VARNING !
LASER WAVE – LENGTH : 780 ∼ 795 OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL
Pulse times : 0.481 ms/6 mm ÄR ÖPPNAD OCH SPÄRREN ÄR URKOPPLAD.
Out put power : 0.20 ± 0.03 mW BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN. – STRÅLEN ÄR FARLIG.
AR-F151
At the production line, the output power Caution

of the scanner unit is adjusted to 0.57 This product contains a low power laser
MILLI-WATT PLUS 20 PCTS and is device. To ensure continued safety do not
maintained constant by the operation of remove any cover or attempt to gain access
the Automatic Power Control (APC). to the inside of the product. Refer all
Even if the APC circuit fails in operation
for some reason, the maximum output servicing to qualified personnel.
power will only be 15 MILLI-WATT 0.1
MICRO-SEC. Giving and accessible
emission level of 42 MICRO-WATT
which is still-less than the limit of
CLASS-1 laser product.
VAROITUS! LAITTEEN KÄYTTÄMINEN MUULLA

KUIN TÄSSÄ KÄYTTÖOHJEESSA MAINITULLA
TAVALLA SAATTAA ALTISTAA KÄYTTÄJÄN
TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1 YLITTÄVÄLLE
NÄKYMÄTTÖMÄLLE LASERSÄTEILYLLE.
VARNING - OM APPARATEN ANVÄNDS PÅ ANNAT

SÄTT ÄN I DENNA BRUKSANVISNING
SPECIFICERATS, KAN ANVÄNDAREN UTSÄTTAS
FÖR OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING, SOM
ÖVERSKRIDER GRÄNSEN FÖR LASERKLASS 1.
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
The foregoing is applicable only to the 220V KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
model, 230V model and 240V model.
AR-F151
[1] GENERAL
1. AR-150/155/F151 major functions
Item GDI
GDI with
CPM SB/MB 2 tray SPF R-SPF FAX without SOPM Duplex
Model USB
USB
AR-150 15CPM MB Opt ∗1 Opt ∗1 Opt Opt

AR-155 15CPM MB Opt Opt
AR-F151 15CPM MB ∗2 Opt
Descriptions of items
CPM: Copy speed (Copies Per Minute)
SB/MB: SB = Manual feed single bypass, MB = Manual feed multi bypass
2 tray: Second cassette unit. The 1 tray unit (AR-DE9) is optionally available.
SPF: Original feed unit
R-SPF: Duplex original feed unit
FAX: FAX function. The AR-FX3 (FAX-SPF and FAX board) is optionally available.)
GDI with USB: GDI printer function with USB. The AR-PG1 (GDI + USB kit) is optionally available.
GDI without USB: GDI printer function without USB. The said model has no option of it.
SOPM: Scan One Print Many function (Many copies are made by one scan.)
Duplex: Auto duplex copy function
Descriptions of table
: Standard provision
: No function or no option available
∗1: Incompatible between SPF and FAX function
∗2: 1 tray option for Europe
2. System Configuration
(AR-150) (AR-F151) (AR-155)
(Options)
AR-DE9
AR-SP3
AR-PG1
AR-FX3
1 – 1
AR-F151
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
1. Basic specifications of copier
A. Basic specifications
Item Spec.
Type Desktop
Copy system Dry, electrostatic
Segment (class) Digital personal copier
AR-150: 518mm × 482.6mm × 292.6mm
External dimensions (W × D × H) (mm) AR-155: 518mm × 482.6mm × 379mm
AR-F151: 518mm × 482.6mm × 465.3mm
AR-150: Approx. 19Kg, (drum cartridges included)
Weight AR-155: Approx. 22Kg, (drum cartridges included)
AR-F151: Approx. 25Kg, (drum cartridges included)
B. Operation specification
Section Item Details Spec.
AR-150/AR-155: 1 tray (250 sheets) + multi bypass (50 sheets)
Paper feed
AR-F151: 2 tray (250 sheets) + multi bypass (50 sheets)
system
(1 tray for Europe)
Paper size A4, B5, A5 (Landscape)
Paper weight 56 – 80g/m2
Tray paper feed
section Paper feed capacity 250 sheets
Kinds Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper
AB system Remark User adjustment of paper guide available
Paper size A4, B5, A5, B6, A6 (Landscape)
Paper weight 52 – 128g/m2
Multi bypass paper
Paper Paper feed capacity 50 sheets
feed section
feed Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP, Label,
section Kinds ∗1
Postal card
Remark User adjustment of paper guide available
Paper size 8-1/2″ × 14″, 8-1/2 × 11″, 8-1/2″ × 5-1/2″ (Landscape)
Paper weight 15 – 21 lbs.
Tray paper feed
section Paper feed capacity 250 sheets
Kinds Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper
Inch system
8-1/2″ × 14″, 8-1/2 × 11″, 8-1/2″ × 5-1/2″, 3-1/2″ × 5-1/2″
Paper size
(Landscape)
Paper weight 14 – 34.5 lbs.
Multi bypass paper
feed section Paper feed capacity 50 sheets
Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP, Label,
Kinds ∗1
Postal card
Paper size A4, B5, A5 (Landscape)
Paper weight 56 – 80 g/m2
AB system
Standard paper,
Paper for Kinds Specified paper,
Duplex Recycled paper
(AR-155
only) Paper size 8-1/2″ × 14″, 8-1/2″ × 11″, 8-1/2″ × 5-1/2″ (Landscape)
Paper weight 15-21 lbs
Inch system
Standard paper,
Kinds Specified paper,
Recycled paper
∗1: OHP, Label, Postal card: each 1 pc.
2 – 1
AR-F151

Exit way Face down
Paper exit section Capacity of output
100 sheets
tray
Original set Center Registration (left edge)
Max. original size B4 (10″ × 14″)
Originals
Original kinds sheet
Original size
None
detection
Scanning system CCD sensor scanning by lighting lamp scanner
CCD sensor Resolution 400 dpi
Scanning
Type Xenon lamp
Optical section
Lighting lamp Voltage 1.5kV
section
Power consumption 11 ± 3W
Gradation 256 gradations/8bit
Writing Writing system Writing to OPC drum by the semiconductor laser

section Laser unit Resolution 600 dpi
Type OPC (30φ)
Photoconductor
Life 18k
Charging system Saw -tooth charging with a grid, / (–) scorotron discharge
Image forming
Charger Transfer system (+) DC corotron system
Separation system (–) DC corotron system
Developing Developing system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush development system
Cleaning Cleaning system Counter blade system (Counter to rotation)
Fusing system Heat roller system
Upper heat roller Type Teflon roller
Fusing section Lower heat roller Type Silicon rubber roller
Type Halogen lamp
Heater lamp Voltage 100V
Power consumption 800W
Voltage Local AC voltage
Power source
Frequency Common use for 50 and 60Hz
Max. AR-150/AR-155: 1000W, AR-F151: 1000W
Electrical section
Average (during copying) *1) AR-150/AR-155: 310Wh/H, AR-F151: 310Wh/H
Power consumption
Average (stand-by) *1) AR-150/AR-155: 70Wh/H, AR-F151: 90Wh/H
1)
Pre-heat mode * AR-150/AR-155: 40Wh/H, AR-F151: 51Wh/H
1)
Auto power shut-off mode * AR-150/AR-155: 18Wh/H, AR-F151: 23Wh/H
*1) May fluctuate due to environmental conditions and the input voltage.
C. Copy performance
3R + 2E (AB system: 50, 70, 81, 100, 141, 200%)
Fixed magnification ratios
Copy magnification (Inch system: 50, 64, 78, 100, 129, 200%)
Zooming magnification ratios 50 ∼ 200% (151 steps in 1% increments)
Manual steps (manual,
5 steps
photo)
2 – 2
AR-F151

9.6 sec. or below (A4), 9.4 sec. or below (8-1/2" ×
Tray paper feed 14") (Pre-heat mode: 16 sec. or below / Auto power-
Copy speed First copy time shut-off mode: 23 sec. or below)
10.0 sec (Pre-heat mode: 16 sec. or below / Auto
Manual paper feed
power-shut-off mode: 23 sec. or below)
Same size 15
AB system: A4
Copy speed (CPM) Enlargement 15
(Landscape)
Reduction 15
Same size 15
B5 (Landscape) Copy speed (CPM) Enlargement 15
Reduction 15
Same size 12
Inch system 8-1/2″
× 14″ (Landscape)
Reduction 12
Same size 15
8-1/2″ × 11″
(Landscape)
Reduction 15
Max. continuous copy
99
quantity
Leading edge 1 ∼ 4mm
4mm or less, 6mm or less
Trailing edge
(Duplex copying/both images)
Void area
4.0mm or less (per side), 4.5mm or less
(Duplex copying/both images: per side)
Void Side edge void area
machine with side edge void 0.5mm ∼ 4mm (Total of
both edge voids)
Same size: 3.0mm or less / Enlarge (200%): 2.0mm
OC mode Leading edge
or less / Reduction (50%): 6.0mm or less
Image loss
SPF/R-SPF/ Same size: 4.0mm or less / Enlarge (200%): 3.0mm
Leading edge
Duplex or less / Reduction (50%): 8.0mm or less
Warm-up time 0 sec.
Power save mode reset time 0 sec.
Paper jam recovery time 0 sec.
2. Basic specifications of facsimile (AR-F151 only)

Large Item Middle Item Small Item Sub Item Spec.
Transmission time Approx. 6 sec. (G3 ECM/14,400bps)
Transmission Method V17, V29, V27TER, V33 (Only Receiving)
Compression method MH, MR, MMR
Communi- Transmission Modem speed 14,400bps → 2,400bps automatic fall back
cation system method Mutual transmission G3
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN), Private
Line used
Branch exchange (PBX),
Number of lines used 1 line (cannot be added)
ECM YES
Max. document width OC: B4 SPF: B4 (Multi)/ 257 × 500 (Single)
Leading edge 1 to 4 mm, trailing edge: 4mm max., left
Unscannable region
end + right end: either 4mm max.
Scanning SPF: Max. 10.1" × 19.7"
Document size
system Transmitted document size SPF: Min. 8.5" × 5.5"(Inch System)
SPF: 210 × 148mm (AB system)
Document size designation B4, 8-1/2, A4, B5, A5, 5/2
Two-sided document
NO
designation
2 – 3
AR-F151

Scanning
Document size Long document 500 mm (Single Feed with hand hold)
system
Automatic SPF YES (Over or Under B4 size)
document
detection OC NO
Transmission SPF/OC transmission

Scanning NO
mode changeover
system
Document Continuous, automatic feed
NO
loading capacity, compatibility
scanning cycle Document loading capacity SPF: 30 sheets
(SPF
13 sheets/min. (Standard mode, A4R memory
performance) Document scanning cycle
transmission)
Equivalent to 256 scales
Following functions are not possible in half-Tone mode
in B4 size.
Half tone ● Timer sending
Half tone (photo mode)
reproduction ● Memory sending
● Broadcast
● To store the original for memory polling.
Image Resolution 8 dot /mm × 7.7 line / mm (Fixed)
processing
system Contrast
Contrast selection Manual in 3 stages (AE)
adjustment
Standard 8 dot / mm × 3.85 line / mm
Resolution Fine 8 dot / mm × 7.7 line / mm
selection
Super fine 8 dot / mm × 15.4 line / mm
Finest NO
Printer section
600dpi
resolution
Max. printing width 215.9 mm
Printing size Print paper size detection YES (Only width): A4/Letter or small size
Printing size A4/Letter/Legal
Print system Cassette capacity 250 × 2 (1 tray option for Europe)
Print paper absence
Print paper By failing paper pick up
detection
Exit Paper Tray Full censor NO
Feed Paper cassette
Rapid key dialing 20 other parties
Speed dialing 100 other parties
20 groups (including the other parties registered to rapid
Group dialing
key dialing)
Easy dialing By using the SEARCH key: Any other parties registered
Trans-
function Phonebook transmission to speed dialing and rapid key dialing can be searched
mission
for using the first letter.
function
system Chain dialing YES
Redialing The last number dialed is saved
Program NO
Mode recall NO
Time
Time specified
designation Time of day specified for transmission or polling. Max.3
transmission/polling
function
2 – 4
AR-F151

Automatic recall mode Intervals 1 to 15 minutes
when other party is busy Count 1 to 14 times/0: no re-transmission
Intervals 1 to 15 minutes
Recall mode when Count 1 to 14 times/0: no re-transmission
communication error occurs
Transmitted
Recall mode Beginning with the page where error occurred
Pages
Number of transmissions
counted in recall mode Max. 20 transmissions
simultaneously
Subsequent transmission
reservation override in YES
recall mode
Memory
YES
Transmission
Number of
transmission
Reservations Max. 20
that can be
made
Transmission is cancelled when using Timer, Group or
Memory Trans- Memory transmission Broadcast function. Only scanned’ data is transmitted.
mission/direct Processing ∗ The number of pages to be actually sent does not
transmission when memory is always correspond to the one passing through the
full SPF in case of communication error.
∗ The transmission is cancelled when communication
error occurs.
Trans-
mission Setting change
function After
NO
system Transmission
Setting
Direct transmission YES
Default setting By Memory All Clear
Line sound
Dialing confirmation
monitoring YES (Service Man diagnostic.)
monitoring
function
Number of
50 destinations (Including the Group Dial)
destinations
Broadcast transmission Transmission
Broadcast Broadcast key, group key
function method
Usable numbers Rapid or Speed keys
Transmitted to group registered to rapid keys or speed
Group dialing
dial.
Instructing
NO
Station
Relay station NO
Multiple relay NO
Boadcast Number of relay

Relay transmission NO
function groups
Number of
Receiving
stations that
NO
may be
Specified per
Group
Confidential Other party’s
Confidential transmission NO
function Station
Batch
transmission Batch transmission NO
function
2 – 5
AR-F151

Transmission reservation
NO
interrupt
Priority function
Broadcast interrupt NO
Recall mode interrupt NO
Multiple
message Multiple message
NO
transmission transmission
function
Rotational
Rotational transmission Paper size NO
Transmission
Transmission
YES (From OC mode)
method
Book document Consecutive
Trans- Book document transmission
transmission page
mission NO
function transmission
system (page splitting)
OK stamp OK stamp NO
Remote transmission Remote
YES (From Memory)
(Memory Polling) Transmission
Check by other
NO
Party’s number
Remote Check by
transmission Matching of
(polling System number
transmission Protective function (user’s own
function) machine) and
NO
ID number
(other party’s
Machine)
(between Sharp
machines only)
Automatic receiving (can be switched to A.M mode or
Default setting
manual receiving in key operator program)
0 to 9 times (factory-set to twice: can be changed in
key operator program)
Number of calls
- The external telephone rings once if set the number
Receiving mode Automatic receiving of calls for automatic receiving to 0 times.
Automatic
phone/fax NO
switching
Manual
Manual receiving YES
Receiving receiving setting
function Number of
system Switching calls
to automatic
Manual receiving OFF/1 to 9 times
Receiving in
manual
receiving mode
Receiving mode
Answering
YES
Machine mode
Telephone message Automatically
receiver connection switch to ON / OFF
automatic receive
Quiet detect time OFF/ 1 to 9 sec.
Receiving mode
NO
timer switching
2 – 6
AR-F151

Reduction made
within Regular YES (ON/OFF in key operator program)
size
Variable scale Reduction
factor receiving By received
data print size YES
Designation
Enlargement NO
Substitute
Receiving into Only when data cannot be output
Memory
Memory Substitute receiving into
receiving function memory Forced memory
NO
receiving
Received data
NO
override Output
Transfer at occurrence of
Transfer YES
trouble
Number Receiving of only specified
NO
specified number enabled
Receiving
receiving Anti junk fax mode YES (ON/OFF) 10 group, 20 letters
function
system Sender NO
Confidential Mailbox NO
Confidential receiving
function Mailbox name NO
Confidential ID
NO
code
Rotational
NO
receiving
Split size YES
Split receiving YES (according to paper selection condition in key
Split receiving setting
operator program)
Two-sided
document NO
receiving
2-in-1 receiving NO
Transmission
Transmission YES
Request
request (polling
Transmission request Resolution at
receiving
function) transmission Depends on the Sending Machine.
Request
Turnaround
NO
transmission
Number of other
100 other parties
parties
Speed dialing Number of other

party’s Number 20 digits
digits
Registered name 20 letters (may be omitted)
Registration Number
Searched letters Up to 1 letter
system registration
User tag
NO
Classification
Speed dialing International
communication NO
mode setting
Transmission
Speed dialing key + (00 to 99) + start key
method
2 – 7
AR-F151

Number of other
20 other parties
parties
Number of other
party’s Number 20 digits
digits
Rapid key dialing Searched letters Up to 1 letter
User tag
NO
Classification
International
communication NO
mode setting
Transmission
Rapid key dialing
method
Registration keys Rapid keys
Max. number of
registered other 50 other parties
Number parties per group
registration
Registrable Numbers registered to speed dialing and rapid key
Group dialing Number dialing.
Searched letters NO
User tag
NO
Classification
Transmission
Group dialing
method
Registration
Number of
system NO
programs
Registerable item NO
Program Registered name NO
Calling method NO
Setting change
NO
After calling
Registration key NO
Number of other
Batch NO
parties
Registration
NO
method
Sender Sender’s name 24 letters, registered in key operator program
Sender registration
Registration Sender’s number 20 digits, registered in key operator program
Transmission
Transmission request Request source
Transmission NO
enable number Number
request/remote Registration
transmission
enable number System number
System number NO
registration Registration
ID number
ID number NO
Registration
Input method Key input YES
Letter input
Letters that may be input Characters Alphanumeric characters, symbols
Registered data
NO
read-out, read-in
Date & time Registered in key operator program
adjustment Support terms is from 1990 to 2089.
Date indication
NO
change
Registered data backup at
Backup SRAM used, built-in battery-backed
power failure
2 – 8
AR-F151

Handset NO
On-hook YES
Hold NO
Pause YES (2 second fixed)
Phone
transmission at NO
power failure
Telephone
Function Ringer volume Adjusted in key operator program
System Speaker volume Adjusted by pressing arrow keys on the fax control panel
Tone pulse Switched between 10 pps and TONE in key operator
switching program (North America)
External YES
telephone
connection Remote receiving switching YES (switching number in 1 digit +**) 0 to 9
Automatic NO
telephone/fax Audio response NO
switching
Response voice recording NO
Standard 2MB (Approx. 120 pages/A4)
Memory capacity
Option NO
Yes
Job memory back up: Approx. 1 hour (after min. 6
Memory Back up
minuts charge)
Configuration Memory back up to 5 years.
Fax Memory
Memory LCD indication NO
Contents
(transmission
reservation) Print out YES
confirmation
Memory remain YES (Memory available percent display 3 digits in % on
indication LCD
Page counter NO
YES (Year: month: day/ year in 4 digits)
Date printing LCD: 2 digits / Print: 4 digits
Date indication change NO
Other party’s
YES
name
Additional Other party’s
YES
information number
Cover function Cover item
printing
Sender’s name YES
function for
transmission Sender’s number YES
Transmission
YES
message
NO MESSAGE/URGENT/
Transmission Regular message IMPORTANT/CONFIDENTIAL/PLS.DISTRIBUTE/PLS.
message CALL BACK
User message NO
Sender printing Sender’s number 20 digits
function Sender’s name 24 letters
Additional
printing
Index printing YES
function for
receiving
2 – 9
AR-F151

Communication record table A4, LETTER, Legal (not output if size setting is not A4,
size LETTER, legal or larger)
Communication record
50 communications for transmission/receiving respectively
memory capacity
Number of
50 communications for transmission/receiving respectively
communications
YES 5 kinds, Every day, Each 2 day, Each 4 day, Once
Time-specified
a week, OFF
output
The print time is fixed at 00:00.
Communication
record function Communication record table When recording
NO
Memory is full
Printing
LAST IN LAST OUT
sequence
Department-by-
department NO
output
Time-specified
Common to transmission record table
communication table
Confidential receiving
NO
confirmation table
Record table
system Communication result table YES (ALWAYS PRINT, ERROR/ TIMER, SEND ONLY,
(transmission) NEVER PRINT, ERROR ONLY)
Broadcast transmission
Communication NO
report
result report
Communication result table
function YES
(receiving)
Document image printing
when memory transmission NO
is not yet made
Rapid key dialing list YES (output as telephone number list)
Speed dialing list YES (output as telephone number list)
Group dialing list YES
Transmission activity list YES
ID/sender list NO
Batch transmission
Other report/list NO
confirmation list
Confidential ID list NO
Option setting list YES
Telephone list YES
Timer list YES
Anti junk fax number list YES
Receptions activity List YES
Memory image erasure list NO
Other party
Other party confirmation
confirmation NO
display
function
CSI function CSI YES
Department-by-department
Others NO
user restriction
Department
management Number of set departments NO
Department-by-department
NO
charge management function
Operation panel
LCD 20 letters by 2 lines
display
2 – 10
AR-F151

Auto startup
NO
mode
Distinctive Ring
(Only North
YES
America and
Australia)
Others Power
Energy star compatibility YES
consumption
Automatic
Summer Set YES
(Only Europe)
PBX setting
YES
(Only Europe)
2 – 11
AR-F151
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS

1. Supply system table
A. USA, CANADA
NO Name Content Life Product name Package Remark
Developer cartridge (Black) Toner/developer cartridge × 1 6.5K AR-150TD 5 Life setting by A4 6%
1
<With IC> (Toner 238g, Developer 190g) (∗1 AR-150TD-J) document
Polyethene Bag × 1
2 Drum cartridge Drum cartridge × 1 18K AR-150DR 5
Polyethene Bag × 1 (∗1 AR-150DR-J)
3 Toner/developer kit (Black) Toner bottle (Toner 228g) × 10 65K AR-150MI 1 Life setting by A4 6%
<With IC> Filling Hose × 1 (∗1 AR-150MI-J) document
IC chip × 10
Toner cap × 10
Developer bottle × 10
(Developer 190g)
DV blade × 10
4 Waste toner box Waste toner box × 10 AR-150TB 1
5 Protective cover MG cover × 10 AR-150MG 1
Drum × 10 180K AR-150MR 1
6 Drum kit
Drum fixing plate × 10 (∗1 AR-150MR-J)
Blade × 10 AR-150CB
7 Blade kit 1
Brush sheet (F/R) Each × 10
8 Toner kit Toner bottle (Toner 228g) × 10 65K AR-150MT 1 Life setting by A4 6%
Filling Hose × 1 (∗1 AR-150MT-J) document
Toner cap × 10
∗1: For USA government

Note: The recommendable number of times of refill for either of the developer cartridge and the drum cartridge is 5 times.
B. Europe / East Europe / Australia / Newzealand / Latin America (SEC)

Developer cartridge (Black) Toner/developer cartridge × 1 6.5K AR-150DC 5 Life setting by A4 6%
1
<With IC> (Toner 238g, Developer 190g) document
Polyethene Bag × 1
2 Drum cartridge Drum cartridge × 1 18K AR-150DM 5
Polyethene Bag × 1
3 Toner/developer kit (Black) Toner bottle (Toner 228g) × 10 65K AR-150LI 1 Life setting by A4 6%
<With IC> Filling Hose × 1 document
IC chip × 10
Toner cap × 10
(Developer 190g)
DV blade × 10
Drum × 10 180K AR-150LR 1
6 Drum kit
Drum fixing plate × 10
Blade × 10
7 Blade kit AR-150CB 1
8 Toner kit Toner bottle (Toner 228g) × 10 65K AR-150LT 1 Life setting by A4 6%
Filling Hose × 1 document
Toner cap × 10
3 – 1
AR-F151
C. Middle East (Except Saudi Arabia) / Africa / CIS / Latin America (Agent)
1
Polyethene Bag × 1
Polyethene Bag × 1
IC chip × 10
Toner cap × 10
(Developer 190g)
DV blade × 10
Drum × 10 180K AR-150LR 1
6 Drum kit
7 Blade kit 1
Toner cap × 10
D. Hong Kong / China

1
Polyethene Bag × 1
Polyethene Bag × 1
3 Toner/developer kit (Black) Toner bottle (Toner 228g) × 10 65K AR-150CI 1 Life setting by A4 6%
IC chip × 10
Toner cap × 10
(Developer 190g)
DV blade × 10
Drum × 10 180K AR-150MR 1
6 Drum kit
7 Blade kit 1
8 Toner kit Toner bottle (Toner 228g) × 10 65K AR-150CT 1 Life setting by A4 6%
Toner cap × 10
3 – 2
AR-F151
E. Asia (Subsidiary)
1
Polyethene Bag × 1
Polyethene Bag × 1
IC chip × 10
Toner cap × 10
(Developer 190g)
DV blade × 10
Drum × 10 180K AR-150MR 1
6 Drum kit
7 Blade kit 1
Toner cap × 10
F. Asia (Agent) – Except Taiwan

1
Polyethene Bag × 1
Polyethene Bag × 1
IC chip × 10
Toner cap × 10
(Developer 190g)
DV blade × 10
Drum × 10 180K AR-150MR 1
6 Drum kit
7 Blade kit 1
Toner cap × 10
3 – 3
AR-F151
G. Saudi Arabia
1
Polyethene Bag × 1
Polyethene Bag × 1
IC chip × 10
Toner cap × 10
(Developer 190g)
DV blade × 10
Drum × 10 180K AR-150LR 1
6 Drum kit
7 Blade kit 1
Toner cap × 10
H. Taiwan
1
Polyethene Bag × 1
Polyethene Bag × 1
IC chip × 10
Toner cap × 10
(Developer 190g)
DV blade × 10
Drum × 10 180K AR-150MR 1
6 Drum kit
7 Blade kit 1
Toner cap × 10
3 – 4
AR-F151
2. Environmental 3. Production control number(lot No.)

The environmental conditions for assuring the copy quality and the identification
machine operations are as follows:
〈Developing cartridge〉
(1) Normal operating condition
Temperature:20˚C~25
Production month
Humidity:65 ± 5%RH
Production day
Destination code
(2) Acceptable operating condition (Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.)
Production place
(SOCC: Fixed to B.)
Humidity (RH) End digit of year
85% Version No.
60%
∗:Destination
Division No.
A same pack G
EX Destination
B same pack H
20% A P
Option Destination
B Q
10˚C 30˚C 35˚C

〈Drum cartridge〉
The label on the drum cartridge shows the date of production.
(3) Optical condition (SOCC production)
Humidity (RH)
Production month
90% Production day
Destination code
(Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.)
60%
Production place
(SOCC: Fixed to B.)
End digit of year
Version No.
15% 〈JAPAN production〉
–25˚C 30˚C 40˚C Ver.A 9 1 1 0001 X

Production month
(1 - 9 = Jan. - Sep. 0 = Oct. X = Nov. Y = Dec.)
Serial number of month
(4) Supply storage condition Fixed to 1.
Pack division
(See table below)
Humidity (RH) End digit of year
90% Version No.
Division No.
Ex production 1
Option 2
Same pack 3
20%
–5˚C 45˚C
3 – 5
AR-F151
A. TD cartridge
1) Remove the waste toner box unit
Production control
label attachment position
Production control
label attachment position(*1)
2) Remove the DVF cover unit.
• When removing, be careful not to break the two pins.
∗1 The production control label is not attached to the cartridge of a

China product.
4. Consumable parts refill procedure

[External view check points]
Check for breakage of the four pins (*) and the ATC sensor connector
of the DV BOX unit.
*Pins *Pins
ATC sensor
connector 3) Remove the THBOX unit.
Check for breakage of molt and suede.

(For reattachment, refer to the reattachment procedure.)
DV molt F DV molt DV molt R
Side sheet F Side sheet R
3 – 6
AR-F151
4) Remove the DV blade. 10) Shake the toner box 20 times up and down, and remove the bottle
• Remove excessive glue. cap and install the refill hose. Check the label to insure that toner
• Remove together with the base PET. is suitable for the model.
5) Tilt the DV box unit and rotate the DV18T clockwise to remove
developer.
11) Face the toner supply port of the TH box unit upward, and press
and insert the refill hose into the toner supply port with the toner
bottle kept straight up.
• Hold the left side of the TH box with your hand.
• Press and insert the refill hose completely.
6) Clean the DV box unit by sucking or blowing with a vacuum cleaner

to remove developer from the MG roller and toner from the DV box
12) Lift the toner bottle and shake it left and right and supply toner
unit. Check that there is no toner or no foreign material attached to
until the bottle and the filling hose are empty.
the connector and the gear.
• It takes about one minute to fill toner completely in TH BOX UN
7) Shake the developer bottle 10 times up and down, and remove the
from lifting the toner bottle to emptying the bottle and the hose.
bottle cap and supply developer into the DV box unit.
• If toner remains in the hose, when removing the hose from TH
• Slowly slant the bottle to supply developer evenly.
BOX UN, the remaining toner may disperse. Use great care for
• Check the label to insure that developer is suitable for the model.
that.
13) Check that there is no toner remaining in the bottle and remove
the hose, and slowly pull and remove the hose.
(If there is any toner remaining in the bottle or the hose, perform
toner supply again.)
8) Install the THBOX unit. Bend the refill hose and remove it from the TH box unit without
• Insert two bosses of TH box on the drive side into the positioning dispersing toner. Attach the toner cap.
hole of the DV box and fix together. • Attach the toner cap with the toner supply port of the TH box unit
9) Remove the toner cap, look into the toner supply port and stop the faced upward.
THD Mylar at the position shown in the figure below. (Rotate the
THK gear on the rear side of the TH box counterclockwise to rotate
the TM shaft.)
3 – 7
AR-F151
14) Clean the DV box unit with alcohol and attach the DV blade. 20) Install the MG cover.
• After drying the unit, attach the DV blade. Put the unit straight with the MG roller on the upper side. Rotate
• After attachment, check that there is no scratch and waves on the DV18T several times forward and reverse to store developer
the DV blade. on the MG roller into the inside. Check that there is no developer
• After attachment, be careful not to damage the DV blade. on the MG roller surface, and install the MG cover.
• Check that there is no foreign material in the DV blade and the Note: When attaching the MG cover, be careful not to wind around
section. the DV blade.
0.5 0.5 0
15) Install the DVF cover to the DV-TH box unit.

16) Clean the waste toner box unit and install it to the DV box unit.
(Check that there is no toner in the waste toner box)
Be careful of the pawl.
17) Replace the IC connector.
Check that there is no oil on the IC connector pins. (Do not touch
with fingers.)
Note for MG cover installation

• When installing, check that there is no breakage and peel-off of
the MG cover sheet and the MG cover molt attached to the MG
cover.
• Check that there is no winding into the DV blade, deformation
and scratches of DV molt F and R.
Put a white mark on the above position.

At that time, put marking for checking of the number of refilling.
18) Check the operations of the DV lever and the toner box shutter.
19) Shake the DV box unit 5 times horizontally. Rotate the DV18T
clockwise and check developer state on the MG roller. (Visually
check that developer state is normal and there is no foreign
material.)
3 – 8
AR-F151
[The reattachment procedure]

Remove the side sheets on the both sides of DV box unit.
Clean the DV box unit with alcohol and reattach the side sheets F and R to the both sides.
0 .5 0 0 0 .5
0 .5
0 .5
0
0
DV box unit F side DV box unit R side
.Remove glue completely before reattaching.

.After drying alcohol, attach the side sheet F,R.
Remove the DV molt F,R and DV molt and clean with alcohol.
After attaching the DV molt F and R, attach the DV molt with the
DV molt R edge as the reference.
DV molt
DV molt F attachment
attachment 0 1
reference
reference
(DV box edge) DV molt R
(DV box edge)
0.5 0 attachment
DV molt attachment
reference 0 0.5 reference
(DV box edge)
(DV box edge)
0.5
0.5
0
0
DV molt
attachment
reference
(DV box edge)
.Do not allow clearance between DV molt and DV molt F.

(Pull and attach them. Overlap may be allowed.)
.Remove glue completely before reattaching.

.After drying alcohol, attach the DV side sheet.
When attaching the DV molt F, When attaching the DV molt R,

0.5 0 0 0.5
projection in the arrow projection in the arrow
direction is not allowed. direction is not allowed.
0 0
0.5 0.5
3 – 9
AR-F151
B. Drum unit 3) Remove the drum fixing plate and the photoconductor drum.
(Note) Dispose the drum fixing plate which was removed.
1) Check the external view.
• Check for damage or cracks on the boss and the boss hole.
• Check to insure that the waste toner pipe shutter slides smooth-
ly.
• Check to insure that the star ring and the CRU washer rotate
smoothly.
LO C K
(2)
(3)
4) Check the cleaning blade and the red felt for no damage.
• If there is any damage, execute all procedures from item 5) and
later.
• If there is no damage, execute the procedure of item 12).
5) Remove the main charger.
(Cleaning the screen grid and the sawteeth.)
2) Remove the drum cover. (4 Lock Tabs)
6) Remove the cleaning blade.

Note: Dispose the cleaning blade which was removed.
3 – 10
AR-F151
7) Clean the cleaning section and the waste toner pipe to remove 12) Attach the drum fixing plate and the photoconductor drum.
waste toner completely with a vacuum cleaner. Apply grease to the inside of the photoconductor drum. (Dia. 2)
8) Remove the felt and duplex tape completely.
Note: Be careful not to scratch or bend the sub blade.
9) Attach the cleaning blade.
Securely insert the plate section of the cleaning blade into the
dove and fix it with a screw.
Do not touch the cleaning blade rubber with your hand.
When attaching the cleaning blade, press the cleaning blade in the
arrow direction and attach.
10) Attach the felt.
Attach the drum from (b). (Prevention against the sub blade edge
breakage)
Attach the drum so that its position with the sub blade is as shown.
13) Attach the detection gear.
Note:
• The detection gear is not installed to the drum cartridge packed
with the main body. Add a new one.
14) Attach the drum cover.

Note: After attaching the drum cover, do not make a copy.
When attaching the drum cover, engage the detection gear
20T rib with the 30T gear rib, and attach the drum cover to
Attach the mocket with slightly pressing section A of the cleaning blade. the process frame.
Do not touch the tip of the cleaning blade. 15) Mark the number of times of recycling on the side of the cover with
Do not put the mocket under the cleaning blade. white paint.
Do not put the mocket on the sub blade. Max. times of recycling: 5 times
Do not press the sub blade with the mocket.
11) Attach the main charger.
Securely set the MC holder on the projection of the process frame.
Securely insert two projections of the MC holder into the groove
in the process frame.
When attaching the MC holder ass’y, be careful not to make con-
tact with the cleaning blade.
Note: Another method of cleaning the drum counter is avail-

able with SIM 24-07.
3 – 11
AR-F151
[4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES

1. Appearance
3 4
14 15 16
5
17
2 AR-F151 only 19
AR-155 only
7 20 18
6
1 8 21
9
22
10
13 24
19
11 23
12
1 Operation panel 2 Original table 3 SPF exit area ∗1

4 Original guides ∗1 5 Document feeder tray ∗1 6 FAX operation panel ∗1
7 Original cover 8 Side cover 9 Bypass tray
10 Bypass tray guides 11 Side cover open button 12 Front cover
13 Paper tray 14 R-SPF exit area ∗2 15 Middle tray ∗2
16 Original guides ∗2 17 Document feeder tray ∗2 18 Feeding roller cover ∗2
19 Handle 20 Cover for optional printer interface ∗ 21 Paper output tray
22 Paper output tray extension 23 Power switch 24 Power cord socket
∗ A GDI expansion kit is optional. ∗1 AR-F151 only ∗2 AR-155 only
2. Internal
1 3
2 4
7
5
6
1 TD cartridge lock release button 2 TD cartridge 3 Drum cartridge

4 Drum cartridge handle 5 Fusing unit release lever 6 Charger cleaner
7 Transfer charger
4 – 1
AR-F151
3. Operation panel
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
18 12 13 14 15 16 17
Exposure mode selector key and indicators Light and dark keys and exposure indicators
Use to sequentially select the exposure modes: AUTO, Use to adjust the MANUAL or PHOTO exposure level.
1 2
MANUAL or PHOTO. Selected mode is shown by a lit Selected exposure level is shown by a lit indicator.
indicator. Use to start and terminate user program setting.
Alarm indicators
:Drum replacement required indicator
SPF indicator
3 :Misfeed indicator 4
(AR-155, AR-F151 only)
:TD cartridge replacement required indicator
:Maintenance indicator
Copy ratio selector key and copy ratio indicators
SPF misfeed indicator Use to sequentially select preset reduction/enlargement
5 6
(AR-155, AR-F151 only) copy ratios.
Selected copy ratio is shown by a lit indicator.
7 Zoom indicator 8 Copy ratio display (%) key
ON LINE indicator / ON LINE KEY
Display Lights up when the machine is used as a printer.
9 Displays the specified copy quantity, zoom copy ratio, 10 To use as a printer, an optional printer expansion kit is
user program code, and error code. needed.
(AR-150, AR-155 only)
Tray select key
Power save indicator
11 12 Use to select a paper feed station (paper tray or
Lights up when the copier is in a power save mode.
bypass tray).
Zoom keys
Paper feed location indicators
13 14 Use to select any reduction or enlargement copy ratio
Light up to show the selected paper feed station.
from 50% to 200% in 1% increments.
Clear key
Copy quantity keys • Press to clear the display, or press during a copy run
15 • Use to select the desired copy quantity (1 to 99). 16 to terminate copying.
• Use to make user program entries. • Press and hold down during standby to display the
total number of copies made to date.
Print key and ready indicator
Duplex Mode select key and indicator
17 • Copying is possible when the indicator is on. 18
(AR-155 only)
• Use to set a user program.
4 – 2
AR-F151
4. A Look at the Operation Panel (AR-F151 only)

1
2 22
21
3
20
ENTER
4 BOOK SEND FUNCTION

AUTO 19
MANUAL
A.M.
5 RESOLUTION CONTRAST BROADCAST

RECEPTION
MODE
6 01 02 03 04 05
18
06 07 08 09 10
17
11 12 13 14 15
16
7
16 17 18 19 20/POLL
ABC DEF DOCUMENT

15
GHI JKL MNO SPEED/
SEARCH
PQRS TUV WXYZ REDIAL/

PAUSE
14
8 SPEAKER
STOP FAX START 13

9
12
10 11
Left arrow key ( ) and right arrow key ( )
Press these keys to scroll through a menu. During FUNCTION key
1 2
input mode, these keys are also sometimes used to Press this key to enter function mode.
move the cursor.
Liquid crystal display
BOOK SEND key
3 Shows various messages during fax operation and 4
Press this key to fax a document from the original table.
programming.
RESOLUTION key CONTRAST key
5 Press this key to adjust the resolution before sending 6 Press this key to adjust the contrast before sending
faxes. faxes.
Rapid keys
Press one of these keys to dial a fax or telephone Number keys
7 number automatically. 8 Press these keys to dial numbers, and enter numbers
Press Rapid key 20 to start polling. (Note that you and letters during number/name storing procedures.
must attach the Rapid key labels.)
∗/ # STOP key
Press these keys to enter symbols during the name Press this key to stop an operation before it is
9 storing procedure. 10 completed, or to delete the number that was last input.
Press the “∗” key to change from pulse dialing to tone This key is also used to close the line when manually
dialing mode. dialing.
FAX START key SPEAKER key
11 Press this key to begin sending a fax or manually 12 Press this key to begin manual dialing. (To close the
receiving a fax. line, press the SPEAKER key again.)
SPEED/SEARCH key
REDIAL/PAUSE key Press this key to dial a two digit Speed Dial number.
Press this key to automatically redial the last number During character inputting, use this key to delete an
13 14
you dialed. Also, press this key to insert a pause when incorrect entry.
entering numbers. Also, press this key twice to search for an automatic
dialing number.
BROADCAST key
DOCUMENT key
15 16 Press this key to send documents to a group of
Press this key to perform a direct send fax transmission.
receiving fax machines.
A.M. light
RECEPTION MODE key
17 18 This light indicates the answering machine will answer
Press this key to select the mode of reception.
the line if properly connected.
MANUAL light AUTO light
19 This light indicates that the machine must be answered 20 This light indicates that the machine will answer the
manually. machine automatically.
ENTER key
LCD contrast dial
21 Press this key to decide an item in a menu, or to enter 22
Turn this dial to adjust the contrast level of the LCD.
numbers and letters you have typed in.
4 – 3
AR-F151
5. Motors and solenoids
11
1
2
3
4
5
9
10
No. Part name Control signal Function operation

1 Toner motor TM Supplies toner.
2 Mirror motor MRMT Drives the optical mirror base (scanner unit).
3 SPF motor SPMT Drives the single pass feeder
4 Original feed solenoid SPUS Original feed solenoid
5 Cooling fan motor VFM Cools the optical section.
6 Main motor MM Drives the copier.
7 Resist roller solenoid RRS Resist roller rotation control solenoid
8 Multi paper feed solenoid MPFS Multi manual pages feed solenoid
9 Paper feed solenoid CPFS1 Cassette paper feed solenoid 1
10 Paper feed solenoid CPFS2 Cassette paper feed solenoid 2
11 Duplex Motor DMT Drivers the duplex paper transport section
4 – 4
AR-F151
6. Sensors and switches

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
15 12 11
14 13
No. Name Signal Type Function Output
Mirror home position Mirror (scanner unit) home
1 MHPS Transmission sensor “H” at home position
sensor position detection
SPF open/close detection
2 SDOD sensor SDOD Transmission sensor “L” at paper pass
Book sensor
3 POD sensor POD Transmission sensor Paper exit detection “H” at paper pass
SPID/ Paper entry detection
4 SPF sensor Transmission sensor “L” at paper pass
SDSW Cover open/close detection
5 SPPD sensor SPPD Transmission sensor Paper transport detection “L” at paper pass
6 PPD2 sensor PPD2 Transmission sensor Paper transport detection 2 “L” at paper pass
Cassette installation
7 Cassette detection switch CED1 Microswitch “H” at cassette insertion
detection
Cassette installation
8 Cassette detection switch CED2 Microswitch
detection
Detects A4/Letter or 1 or 0V of 5V at door
9 Paper size detection switch PSW1 Microswitch
smaller sizes open
Paper size detection Detects A4/Letter or
10 PSW2 Microswitch
swtich 2 smaller sizes
Door open/close detection 1 or 0V of 5V at door
13 Door switch DSW Micro switch
(safety switch for 5V) open
Door open/close detection 1 or 0V of 24V at door
14 Door switch DSW Micro switch
(safety switch for 24V) open
Instantaneously “H” at
15 Drum reset switch DRST Micro switch New drum detection switch
insertion of new drum
4 – 5
AR-F151
7. PWB unit
2
3
1
4 5
6
12 8
11
10 9
No. Name Function

1 Exposure lamp invertor PWB Exposure lamp (Xenon lamp) control
2 GDI/USB PWB For GDI/USB interface
3 Main PWB (MCU) Copier control
4 FAX control PWB For FAX control
5 Memory PWB 6MB For memorying data
6 FAX operation PWB Operation input/LCD display
7 LSU PWB For laser control
8 LSU motor PWB For polygon motor drive
9 TCS PWB For toner sensor control
10 Operation PWB Operation input/display
11 CCD sensor PWB For image scanning
12 Power PWB AC power input, DC voltage control, High voltage control
4 – 6
AR-F151
8. Cross sectional view
5 6 7
3 4
1 2 8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17 (AR-F151)
19 18
No. Part name Function and operation

1 Paper exit roller Roller for paper exit
2 Lens unit Scans the original image with the lens and the CCD.
3 LSU (Laser unit) Converts the original image signal into laser beams and writes onto the drum.
4 Main charger Provides negative charges evenly to the drum surface.
5 Paper exit roller Discharges documents.
6 Pickup roller Picks up documents.
7 Separation roller Separates documents to feed properly.
8 PS roller Feeds documents to the scanning section.
9 Scanner unit Illuminates the original with the copy lamp and passes the reflected light to the lens unit (CCD).
10 Exposure lamp Exposure lamp (Xenon lamp) Illuminates original
11 Heat roller Fuses toner on the paper. (Teflon roller)
12 Pressure roller Fuses toner on the paper. (Silicon rubber roller)
13 Drum Forms images.
14 Transfer unit Transfers images onto the drum.
15 Pickup roller Picks up the manual feed paper. (In multi feed only)
Manual paper feed
16 Tray for manual feed paper
tray
Manual paper feed
17 Transport the paper from the manual paper feed port.
roller
18 PS roller unit Takes synchronization between the lead edge and the rear edge of the paper.
19 Paper feed roller Picks up a sheet of paper from the cassette.
4 – 7
AR-F151
[5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 8"(20cm) 8"(20cm)
1. COPIER INSTALLATION
Improper installation may damage the copier. Please note the 4" 4"
following during initial installation and whenever the copier is (10cm) (10cm)
moved.
Caution: If the copier is moved from a cool place to a warm 2. CAUTIONS ON HANDLING
place, condensation may form inside the copier.
Be careful in handling the copier as follows to maintain the per-
Operation in this condition will cause poor copy
formance of this copier.
quality and malfunctions. Leave the copier at room
temperature for at least 2 hours before use. Do not drop the copier, subject it to shock or strike it against
any object.
Do not install your copier in areas that are:
● damp, humid, or very dusty
● exposed to direct sunlight

Do not expose the drum cartridge to direct sunlight.
Doing so will damage the surface (green portion) of the drum
cartridge, causing poor print quality.
● poorly ventilated
Store spare supplies such as drum cartridges and TD

cartridges in a dark place without removing from the package
before use.
If they are exposed to direct sunlight, poor print quality may

result.
Do not touch the surface (green portion) of the drum cartridge.

● subject to extreme temperature or humidity changes, e.g.,
near an air conditioner or heater.
Doing so will damage the surface of the cartridge, causing poor
print quality.
The copier should be installed near an accessible power outlet

for easy connection.
Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that

meets the specified voltage and current requirements.
Also make certain the outlet is properly grounded.
Be sure to allow the required space around the machine for

servicing and proper ventilation.
5 – 1
AR-F151
3. CHECKING PACKED COMPONENTS AND 6. INSTALLING THE TD CARTRIDGE

ACCESSORIES The TD cartridge replacement required ( ) indicator will light
Open the carton and check if the following components and ac- up when toner is needed. If copying is continued while the
cessories are included. indicator is lit, copies will gradually become lighter until the
copier stops and the indicator begins blinking. Replace the old
Power cord TD cartridge by following the procedure given below.
Note:
● After the copier stops, it may be possible to make a few
Line cord more copies by taking the TD cartridge out of the copier,
FAX model shaking it horizontally, then reinstalling it. If copying is
only
not possible after this operation, replace the TD
TD cartridge cartridge.
● During long copy run of a dark original, the ready ( )
indicator may blink, the indicator light up, and the
copier stop, even though toner is left. The copier will feed
toner up to 2 minutes and then the ready ( ) indicator
will light up. Press the print ( ) key to restart copying.
1) Ensure that the bypass tray is open and then open the side
Copier cover while pressing the side cover open button.
Drum cartridge
(installed in copier)
4. UNPACKING
Be sure to hold the handles on both sides of the copier to un-
pack the copier and carry it to the installation location.
2) Remove the CAUTION tape from the front cover and

remove the two protective pins from the fusing unit by pull-
ing the strings upward one at a time.
3) Push gently on both sides of the front cover to open the
cover.
5. REMOVING PROTECTIVE PACKING

MATERIALS
1) Remove pieces of tape and protective cover. Then open the
original cover and remove protective materials (a) and (b).
4) Remove the TD cartridge from the bag. Remove the protec-

2) Use a coin (or suitable object) to remove the screw. tive paper. Hold the cartridge on both sides and shake it
Store the screw in the paper tray because it will be used if horizontally four or five times.
the copier has to be moved.
4 or 5 times
5 – 2
AR-F151
5) Hold the tab of the protective cover and pull the tab to 2) Remove the pressure plate lock. Rotate the pressure plate
remove the cover. lock in the direction of the arrow to remove it while pressing
down the pressure plate of the paper tray.
3) Store the pressure plate lock which has been removed in
step 2 and the screw which has been removed when un-
packing (see page 4-2, step 2 of REMOVING PROTEC-
TIVE PACKING MATERIALS) in the front of the paper tray.
To store the pressure plate lock, rotate the lock to fix it on
the relevant location.
4) Adjust the paper guides on the paper tray to the copy paper
width and length.
Squeeze the lever of paper guide (A) and slide the guide to
match with the width of the paper.
6) Gently insert the TD cartridge until it locks in place. Move paper guide (B) to the appropriate slot as marked on
the tray.
Paper guide (B) Paper guide (A)
5) Fan the copy paper and insert it into the tray. Make sure the
7) Close the front cover and then the side cover by pressing edges go under the corner hooks.
the round projections near the side cover open button. The Note: Do not load paper above the maximum height line ( ).
indicator will go out and the ready ( ) indicator will Exceeding the line will cause a paper misfeed.
light up.
Note: When closing the covers, be sure to close the front
cover securely and then close the side cover. If the
covers are closed in the wrong order, the covers may be
damaged.
6) Gently push the paper tray back into the copier.

Note: After loading copy paper, to cancel the blinking “P”
without restarting copying, press the clear ( ) key.
The “P” in the display will go out and the ready ( ) in-
7. LOADING COPY PAPER dicator will light up.
Note: This copier is equipped with two paper trays. Load copy
paper into the two paper trays.
1) Raise the handle of the paper tray and pull the paper tray
out until it stops.
5 – 3
AR-F151
8. Connecting the Telephone Line Cord ● You can connect an extension phone to the unit to make and
receive calls like any other extension phone on your line.
Plug one end of the telephone line cord into the jack on the unit
Even if you pick up the extension phone and hear a fax tone,
marked “LINE” .Plug the other side into a standard (RJ11C)
the unit will automatically cut in and take over the line. Note,
single-line telephone wall jack. Be sure not to plug this line cord
however, that if you also have a PC modem on the same
into the “TEL” jack. The “TEL” jack is used to attach an exten-
line, you must turn on the Remote Reception function, and
sion telephone or answering machine to the unit. (See “Con-
deactivate the Fax Signal Receive function. See “Setting Up
necting Other Devices” in this chapter for details.)
the Unit for Use with a PC Modem” and “Using the Remote
Reception Function” in Chapter 2).
Note: If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or
power surges, we recommend that you install surge
Note: The Remote Reception function is initially set to “ON”.
protectors for the power and telephone lines. Surge
protectors can be purchased from your dealer or at most
telephone specialty stores. 10. POWER TO COPIER
1) Ensure that the power switch of the copier is in the OFF
position. Insert the attached power cord into the power cord
socket at the rear of the copier.
2) Plug the other end of the power cord into the nearest outlet.
L
TE
E
LIN
9. Connecting Other Devices

If desired, an answering machine or external telephone can be
connected to the unit through the telephone jack, labeled “TEL”,
on the rear of the unit.
● Connecting an answering machine to the unit allows you to

receive both voice and fax messages when you are out. To
use this feature, first change the outgoing message of your
answering machine, and then set the reception mode of the
unit to “A.M”. (Answering Machine mode) when you go out.
Note: If you are using distinctive ringing with an answering

machine, you do not need to follow the procedure
described below. (Please note that when distinctive ring-
ing is used, the answering machine must be connected
to a separate wall jack, not to your fax.)
The outgoing message of your answering machine should be

changed to inform callers who want to send a fax to press their
FAX START key.
Comments:
1) It is advisable to keep the length of the message under 10
seconds. If it is too long, you may have difficulty receiving
faxes sent by automatic dialing.
2) Your callers can even leave a voice message and send a
fax message on the same call. Modify your outgoing mes-
sage to explain that this can be done by pressing their FAX
START key after leaving their voice message.
5 – 4
AR-F151
[6] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS

1. Outline of operation
The outline of operation is described referring to the basic configuration.
(Basic configuration)
Scanner section
CCD
Operation
section
MCU (Main control/image process section)
LSU (Laser unit)

Laser diode, Polygon mirror lens
Laser beam
Paper exit
Fusing section
Process section
Printer section
Paper transport section
Cassette paper Manual paper

feed section feed section
(Outline of copy operation)

Setting conditions
1) Set copy conditions such as the copy quantity and the copy density with the operation section, and press the COPY button. The information
on copy conditions is sent to the MCU.
Image scanning
2) When the COPY button is pressed, the scanner section starts scanning of images.
The light from the copy lamp is reflected by the document and passed through the lens to the CCD.
Photo signal/Electric signal conversion
3) The image is converted into electrical signals by the CCD circuit and passed to the MCU.
Image process
4) The document image signal sent from the CCD circuit is processed under the revised conditions and sent to the LSU (laser unit) as print data.
Electric signal/Photo signal (laser beam) conversion
5) The LSU emits laser beams according to the print data.
(Electrical signals are converted into photo signals.)
6) The laser beams are radiated through the polygon mirror and various lenses to the OPC drum.
Printing
7) Electrostatic latent images are formed on the OPC drum according to the laser beams, and the latent images are developed to be visible im-
ages (toner images).
8) Meanwhile the paper is fed to the image transfer section in synchronization with the image lead edge.
9) After the transfer of toner images onto the paper, the toner images are fused to the paper by the fusing section. The copied paper is discharged
onto the exit tray.
6 – 1
AR-F151
2. Scanner section Sub scanning direction

Sensor scanning area
A. How to scan documents Main
The scanner has sensors that are arranged in a line. These sensors scan a scanning
certain area of a document at a time and deliver outputs sequentially. When direction
the line is finished, the next line is scanned, and this procedure is repeated.
The figure below shows the case where the latter two sections of an image
which are scanned are shown with solid lines and the former two sections
which are being transmitted are shown with dotted lines.
The direction of this line is called “main scanning direction,” and the scanning
direction “sub scanning direction.” Original
In the figure above, one line is divided into 4 sections. Actually, however, one
line is divided into thousands of sections. For scanning, the light receiving ele-
1
ment called CCD is used.
The basic resolution indicates the scanner capacity. The basic resolution is ex- 2
pressed in dpi (dot/inch) which shows the number of light emitting elements per
3
inch on the document.
The basic resolution of this machine is 400dpi. 4
In the sub scanning direction, at the same time, the motor that drives the op-
tical system is controlled to scan the image at the basic resolution. 5
Image data sent to the ICU PWB
5 4 3 2 1
To MCU PWB
B. Basic structure of scanner section
(11) (4) (1) (2) (8)
(5) (7) (3) (6) (9) (10)
1 Copy lamp (Xenon lamp) 2 Reflector (light conversion plate) 3 No. 1 mirror
4 No. 2 mirror 5 No. 3 mirror 6 Lens
7 No. 2/3 mirror unit 8 Copy lamp unit 9 CCD
10 Mirror motor 11 MHPS (Mirror home position sensor)
The scanner unit performs scanning in the digital optical system.

The light from the light source (Xenon lamp) is reflected by a document and passed through three mirrors and reduction lenses to the CCD element
(image sensor) where images are formed. This system is known as the reduction image sensor system. Photo energy on the CCD element is con-
verted into electrical signals (analog signals). (Photo-electric conversion). The output signals (analog signals) are converted into digital signals (A/D
conversion) and passed to the MCU (main control/image process section). The resolution at that time is 400dpi.
The mirror unit in the scanner section is driven by the mirror motor.
The MHPS is provided to detect the home position of the copy lamp unit.
3. Laser unit
The image data sent from the MCU (image process circuit) is sent to (3) (2) (1)
the LSU (laser unit), where it is converted into laser beams.
A. Basic structure (4)
The LSU unit is the writing section of the digital optical system.
The semiconductor laser is used as the light source, and images are : Laser beam
path for BF PWB
formed on the OPC drum by the polygon mirror and fθ lens, etc.
The laser beams are passed through the collimator lens, the cylindrical
lens, the polygon mirror, the fθ lens, and the mirror to form images on
the OPC drum in the main scanning direction. The laser emitting PWB
is provided with the APC (auto power control) in order to eliminate fluc-
tuations in the laser power. The BF PWB works for measurement of the (5)
laser writing start point.
6 – 2
AR-F151
No. Component Function 4. Fuser section

(1) Semiconductor laser Generates laser beams.
Converges laser beams in
(2) Collimator lens
parallel.
Polygon mirror, Reflects laser beams at a
(3)
polygon motor constant rpm.
BD (Mirror, lens, Detects start timing of laser
(4)
PWB) scanning.
Converges laser beams at a
spot on the drum.
(5) fθ lens Makes the laser scanning

speeds at both ends of the
drum same as each other.
(Refer to the figure below.)
Makes the laser scanning speeds at both ends of the drum same as
each other.
a≠b≠c d=e=f
a b c d e f
A. General description
General block diagram (cross section)
Thermal fuse Separator pawl
PPD2
f θ LENS
B. Laser beam path
Thermistor
Pressure roller
Heat roller
Paper guide
Top view
Thermal fuse
Thermistor
Heat roller Heater lamp
C. Composition Separator pawl

Effective scanning width: 216mm (max.)
(1) Heat roller
Resolution: 600dpi
A pressure roller is used for the heat roller and a silicone rubber roller
Beam diameter: 75um in the main scanning is used for the lower heat roller for better toner fusing performance and
direction, 80um in the sub scanning paper separation.
direction
0.20 ±0.03mW (Laser wavelength (2) Separator pawl
Image surface power:
780 – 795nm) Three separator pawls are used on the upper heat roller. The separator
pawls are teflon coated to reduce friction with the roller and prevent a
Brushless motor 20.787rpm
Polygon motor section: smear on the paper caused by the separator pawl.
No. of mirror surfaces: 6 surfaces
6 – 3
AR-F151
(3) Thermal control 2. The surface temperature of the upper heat roller is set to 165˚C ∼
1. The heater lamp, thermistor, main PWB, DC power supply PWB, 190˚C. The surface temperature during the power save mode is set
and triac within the power supply unit are used to control the to 100˚C.
temperature in the fuser unit.
To prevent against abnormally high temperature in the fuser unit, a 3. The self-check function comes active when one of the following
thermal breaker and thermal fuse are used for safety purposes. malfunctions occurs, and an "H" is displayed on the multicopy win-
dow.
a. When the heat roller surface temperature rises above 240˚C.
b. When the heat roller surface temperature drops below 100˚C
during the copy cycle.
Heated by the heater c. Open thermistor
lamp.(950W) d. Open thermal fuse
e. When the heat roller temperature does not reach 190˚C within
27 second after supplying the power.
Saftey device
(Thermal breaker, thermal The surface temperature (4) Fusing resistor
fuse) of the upper heat roller is Fusing resistor
sensed by the thermistor. This model is provided with a fusing resistor in the fusing section to im-
prove transfer efficiency.
General descriptions are made in the following.
Level of the thermistor is General descriptions

controlled by the main PWB . Since the upper heat roller is conductive when copy paper is highly
Triac (in the moistured and the distance between the transfer unit and the fusing
power supply unit) unit is short, the transfer current leaks through the copy paper, the
upper heat roller and the discharging brush.
With th e signal from the
main PWB, the triac is
controlled on and o ff.
(power supply PWB )
5. Paper feed section and paper transport section

A. Paper transport path and general operations
(2) (1) (5) (3) (4) (6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(15) (14) (13) (12)
(1) Scanner unit (6) Main charger (11) Pickup roller

(2) Copy lamp (7) Heat roller (12) Manual paper feed tray
(3) Lens unit (8) Pressure roller (13) Manual paper feed roller
(4) LSU (Laser unit) (9) Drum (14) PS roller unit
(5) Paper exit roller (10) Transfer unit (15) Paper feed roller
Paper feed is made in two ways; the tray paper feed and the manual paper feed. The tray is of universal-type, and has the capacity of 250 sheets.
The front loading system allow you to install or remove the tray from the front cabinet.
The general descriptions on the tray paper feed and the manual paper feed are given below.
6 – 4
AR-F151
(1) Cassette paper feed operation 5) At this time, the paper is fed passed the paper entry detection
1) The figure below shows the positions of the pick-up roller, the paper switch (PPD1), and detected by it. After about 0.15 sec from detec-
feed clutch sleeve, and the paper feed latch in the initial state tion of paper by PPD1, the tray paper feed solenoid (PFS) turns on
without pressing the COPY button after lighting the ready lamp. so that the clutch sleeve projection comes into contact with the
The paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of the clutch paper feed latch to stop the pick-up roller. Then the pick-up roller
sleeve. rotates for about 0.15 sec so that the lead edge of the paper is
evenly pressed on the resist roller, preventing against skew feed-
ing.
2) When the COPY button is pressed, the main drive motor starts
rotating to drive each drive gear.
The pick-up drive gear also is driven at that time. Since, however,
the paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of the clutch
sleeve, rotation of the drive gear is not transmitted to the pick-up
roller, which does not rotate therefore. PFS
RRS
PFS ON
RRS OFF
OFF
OFF
6) To release the resist roller, the tray paper feed solenoid and the
resist solenoid are turned on by the paper start signal to disengage
3) After about 0.1 sec from when the main motor start rotating, the the resist start latch from the clutch sleeve projection, transmitting
tray paper feed solenoid (PFS) turns on at a moment. rotation of the resist drive gear to the resist roller shaft. Thus the
This disengages the paper feed latch from the projection of the paper is transported by the resist roller.
clutch sleeve, transmitting rotation of the pick-up drive gear to the
paper feed roller shaft, rotating the pick-up roller to feed the paper. 7) After the resist roller starts rotating, the paper is passed through the
pre-transfer guide to the transfer section. Images are transferred on
the paper, which is separated from the OPC drum by the drum
curve and the separation section.
PFS
RRS PFS
OFF RRS
OFF OFF
ON
4) After more than half rotation of the pick-up roller, the paper feed
latch is brought in contact with the projection of the clutch sleeve,
8) The paper separated from the drum is passed through the fusing
stopping rotation of the pick-up roller.
paper guide, the heat roller (fusing section), POD (paper out detec-
tor) to the copy tray.
6 – 5
AR-F151
(2) Manual multi paper feed operation

1) Before paper feed operation, the manual paper feed solenoid
(MPFS) is turned OFF as shown in the figure below.
A
C
C A
ON
MPFS
OFF 4) The lead edge of the transported paper is pressed on the resist
MPFS roller by the transport roller. Then the paper is stopped temporarily
to make synchronization with the lead edge of the image on the
2) When the PRINT button is pressed, the manual paper feed OPC drum.
solenoid (MPFS) turns on to disengage the manual paper feed latch The operations hereinafter are the same as the paper feed opera-
A from the manual paper feed clutch sleeve A, rotating the manual tions from the tray. (Refer to A-5 ∼ 8.)
paper feed roller and the manual take-up roller. At the same time,
the manual paper feed stopper opens and the manual take-up roller 5) The solenoid turns off to close the gate and return to the initial
is pressed to the surface of the paper to start paper feeding. state.
C
A
A C
ON OFF
MPFS MPFS
3) When pawl C of the manual paper feed clutch sleeve is hung on the (3) Conditions of occurrence of paper misfeed
manual feed latch, the manual feed stopper falls and the manual a. When the power is turned on:
take-up roller rises. At that time, the manual paper feed roller is PPD or POD is ON when the power is turned on.
rotating. b. Copy operation
a. PPD1 jam 1) PPD1 does not turn off within 4 sec
after turning on the resist roller.
b. PPD2 jam 1) PPD2 is off immediately after turning on
the resist roller.
2) PPD2 does not turn off within 1.2 sec
after turning off the resist roller.
6 – 6
AR-F151
c. POD jam 1) POD does not turn on within 2.9 sec

after turning on the resist roller.
2) POD does not turn off within 1.5 sec ∼
2.7 sec after turning off PPD2.
6. Process unit new drum detection mechanism

1) When the power is turned on, the detection gear 38T is rotated in 2) When the detection gear 38T turns one rotation, there is no gear
the arrow direction by the detection gear 20T to push the micros- any more and it stops.
witch (process detection switch) installed to the machine sensor The latch section of the 38T gear is latched and fixed with the
cover, making a judgement as a new drum. projection of the process cover.
Gear notch
Gear 20T
Gear 38T
Gear pawl
Projection
Gear notch
Process detection switch
Projection
Gear pawl
7. FAX-SPF section (AR-F151 only)

A. Outline
The SPF (Single Path Feeder) is installed to the AR-F151 as a standard provision, and it automatically copies up to 30 sheets of documents of a
same size. (Only one set of copies)
B. Document transport path and basic composition
(1) Pickup roller (2) Sheet of document for paper feed (3) Set detection ACT
(4) Paper stopper (5) Document feed roller (6) Separation sheet
(7) Paper entry sensor (8) PS roller D (9) Transport follower roller
(10) Paper exit roller (11) Paper exit follower roller (12) Document tray
6 – 7
AR-F151
C. Operational descriptions
Time chart (Tray feed)

Document set
SPID ON Document set sensor
Document feed unit lamp ON
PSW ON Copy start
The scanner is shifted

MIRM rotation to the exposure position.
(Copier side) (SPF side)
MM rotation Main motor rotation SPFM rotation SPF motor rotation
CPFS ON Paper feed

SPUS ON Document feed
PPD ON
RRC ON Synchronization SPPD ON Document transport sensor
Paper transport Document transport

(Transfer) (Exposure)
(Fusing) (Document exit)
POD ON
(Paper exit)
In the zooming mode, the magnification ratio in the sub
scanning direction (paper transport direction) is adjusted
by changing the document transport speed.
D. Cases where a document jam is caused

a. When SPPD is ON (document remaining) when the power is turned on.
b. When SPPD is not turned ON within about 1.5 sec (at 100% copy) after starting the document feed operation.
c. When SPPD is not turned on within about 4.7 sec (at 100% copy) after turning on SPPD.
d. When the SPF document jam release door or the OC cover is opened during document transport (SPF motor rotating).
6 – 8
AR-F151
8. D-D (Duplex to Duplex) mode → R-SPF gate solenoid OFF

→ The document is discharged to the document
paper/document transport (AR-155 only) exit tray.
A. Initial state Paper transport: Switchback operation is performed.
→ The paper is sent through the upper side of
Set duplex documents on the document tray. the gate section and the duplex transport sec-
Set paper on the cassette. (In the duplex mode, the manual feed tray
tion, and the PS roller, and the images on the
cannot be selected.)
back are transferred.
B. Front copy → It is sent through the fusing section and dis-
charged to the paper exit tray.
Document transport: The document feed roller feeds the document
from the paper feed roller to the PS roller.
Gate ON
→ The document is exposed in the exposure
section, and sent to the document exit section
by the transport/paper exit roller.
→ R-SPF gate solenoid ON
→ The document is sent to the intermediate tray Upper Side of Gate
(but not discharged completely.)
→ The document is stopped once, then
switchback operation is performed. (To the
back copy)
Paper transport: The document is passed through the paper feed

roller and the PS roller by the paper feed roller
and the images on the front surface are trans-
ferred.
Gate ON
→ The paper is passed through the fusing sec-
tion and the lower side of the gate section to
the paper exit tray side, (but not discharged
completely.)
→ It is stopped once and switchback operation
is performed. (To the back copy)
Gate OFF
Lower Side of Gate
Gate OFF
Gate ON
Switchback operation is made after back copying in order to discharge

documents according to the setting.
Set document Documents after discharge,
1 4 3
with empty feed without empty feed
2 3 4
3 2 1
C. Back copy 4 1 2
Document transport: By switchback operation, the document is sent There are following job modes as well as D-D mode.
through the PS roller to the exposure section,
where the back of the document is exposed. S - S (Simplex to Simplex)
→ It is sent to the document exit section by the S - D (Simplex to Duplex), Rotation copy mode (The back images are
transport roller and the paper exit roller. rotated 180˚.)
→ R-SPF gate solenoid ON. The document is S - D (Simplex to Duplex), Copy mode without rotation
sent to the intermediate tray, (but not dis- D - S (Duplex to Simplex)
charged completely.)
→ It is stopped once and switchback operation Rotation copy mode:
is performed. The front and the back are in upside down each other.
→ It is sent through the PS roller and the ex- Copy mode without rotation:
posure section (without exposure operation) The front and the back are not in upside down.
to the document exit section.
6 – 9
AR-F151
9. FAX-OPERATION FLOWCHART (AR-F151 only)
FLOW-VE1
Start
WT
Cl signal received?
No No
Button pressed? Auto dial
Yes Yes
RX CML ON AU
No
START key pressed?
Yes
No
Documents exist?
Yes
No No
OFF HOOK? OFF HOOK?
Yes Yes
CML ON CML ON
RX TX
Send DCN
TD DL
Line out routine Send DCN

ER DR
CML signal OFF CML signal OFF
Beep alam END beep
WT
TD1
Communicatinon error flag ON
TD
6 – 10
AR-F151
FLOW-VE-2
TX
Tum on TEL LED
TX3
NO NO
Command received? T1 elapsed?
YES YES
NO
DIS or DTC ER
TX1 YES
YES ER
Polling mode? RX1
TX2 NO
Set mode
Insert document
Send DCS
Make 75msec delay
Send traning
Send TCF
YES NO
TD 3 retrys? Response received?
YES YES
DIS?
YES NO
NO YES
TX1 3 retrys? DTC?
NO
YES
FTT?
NO
YES NO
Fall back possible? CFR? TD
NO TX6 YES
NO
Document on? TD
YES
Send traning?
TD1
Send image information
Send RTC
75msec delay
NO
YES
Last document
NO
YES
Mode change?
Send EOM Send MPS Send EOP

NO NO NO
NO NO NO YES
3 times? Response received? 3 times? Response received? Response received? 3 times?
YES YES YES YES YES

YES TD1 PIN or PIP TD1
PIN or PIP PIN or PIP
TD1
NO NO NO
YES
MCF YES YES
TX6 MCF MCF
NO
YES NO YES
RTP YES
RTP RTP
NO
YES NO TX7
RTN YES TD
TX2 RTN RTN
NO
YES NO NO
Tx3
DL
TD
6 – 11
AR-F151
FLOW-VE-3
RX
2sec delay
Send CED
75ms delay
RX1
YES Answer procedure
Polling mode
Send (NSC) DTC?
Send (NSF) DIS Send (NSF) (CSI)-DIS 2times
NO
NO
Response received? T1 elapsed?
YES
YES
TX2 DTC
ER
NO
YES
DIS TX1
NO
NO
DCS
YES
NO
Enough Memory?
YES
Send DCN Set mode on this side
CML OFF Receive training TCF

3 sec msx.
NO
TCF good?
YES
Beep Send CFR Send FTT
RX2
STOP
Set T2
YES
Command received?
NO
Message carrier received?
NO
YES YES
RX1 EOM T2 elapsed? Receive message
NO NO
RTC received?
Set communication error flag YES YES
PR1-Q Message in received?
NO
YES
ER MPS
TL2
NO
RX3 YES
EOP
NO
YES
EOM
NO
ER YES
Memory Full? TD
NO
NO
Image quality good?
YES
Line good?
Send RTN Send RTP Send MCF
RX2
6 – 12
AR-F151
FLOW-VE-4
Response received?
1
NO
NO NO
1 T4 elapsed? Flag?
YES NO
NO NO
Flag received? Signal end? 3sec elapsed?
YES YES YES
YES NO YES
FCS error? 200ms elapsed?
NO NO
YES TD
NO CRP?
3sec elapsed? Signal end? 1
YES NO
YES YES
NO DR
200ms elapsed? RCN
YES NO
YES
Option response?
ER
1 Process against
NO option response
Retum "NO" Retum "YES"
2
Command received?
NO
Flag?
YES
Reset T2
YES NO
NO NO
3sec elapsed? Signal end? Frame received?
YES NO
YES YES NO
FCS error? Signal end? 3sec elapsed?
200ms elapsed?
NO NO YES YES
YES 200ms elapsed?
DR DCN
NO YES
ER
NO YES
Option response? CRP?
YES NO
Response CRP
Process against
option response
Retum "YES"
Retum "NO"
6 – 13
AR-F151
Auto dial sending
Enter
Relay ON
Pause 2sec
NO
Dial Tone?
YES
YES YES
NO Busy or Reorder
OVER 3sec?
Tone?
YES NO
Recall
Recall Send CNG
YES
Preambles
Pulse or tone
Tone Pulse YES

Signal send by Pulse send by CED?
MODEM relay
NO NO
Registration
45sec
TEL end
Recall Phase B
6 – 14
AR-F151
(2) Push up the lock pawls (2 positions) of the side cover, and remove
[7] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY the transfer charger.
Before disassembly, be sure to disconnect the power cord for safety.
The disassembly and assembly procedures are described for the fol- Lock pawl rear
lowing sections:
1. High voltage section
2. Operation panel section
3. Optical section 1)
4. Fusing section
5. Tray paper feed/transport section
6. Manual paper feed section
7. Rear frame section
8. Power section
9. SPF section
10. 2nd cassette section
11. DUP motor section
12. Reverse roller section
13. RSPF section
14. FAX MCU PWB section
15. FAX-SPF section
1. High voltage section

A. List
No. Part name Ref. 2)
1 Transfer charger unit
2 Charger wire
Transfer
charger 1)
B. Disassembly procedure
(1) Press the side cover open/close button and open the side cover.
Lock pawl front
C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
D. Charger wire cleaning

(1) Remove the charger cleaner from the manual paper feed unit.
1)
2)
1)
7 – 1
AR-F151
(2) Set the charger cleaner to the transfer unit, and move it reciprocal- 2. Operation panel section
ly a few times in the arrow direction shown in the figure below.
A. List
No. Part name Ref.
4) 1 Operation panel unit
3)
2 Operation PWB
2)
(1) Remove the screws (4 pcs.), the harness, and the operation panel
unit.
1)
1)
1)
2)
3)
1)
E. Charger wire replacement
(1) Remove the TC cover and remove the screw.
(2) Remove the spring and remove the charger wire.
(3) Install a new charger wire by reversing the procedures (1) and (2).
At that time, be careful of the following items.
● The rest of the charger wire must be within 1.5mm.
● The spring hook section (charger wire winding section) must be
in the range of the projection section. (2) Remove the screws (3 pcs.) and the PWB holder.
● Be careful not to twist the charger wire. (3) Remove the screws (3 pcs.) and the operation PWB.
1)
3)
1)
Charger wire
1)
3)
2)
2)
3)
3)
1mm 4)
Protrusion
1.5mm
Note that there are 13 pawls
7 – 2
AR-F151
C. Assembly procedure (2) Remove the screws (2pcs.), and remove the copy lamp unit from
the mirror base drive wire.
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure
3. Optical section
A. List
NO. Part name Ref.
1 Copy lamp unit
2 Copy lamp
3 Lens unit
2)
(1) Remove the parts as shown below. 3)
1) 1)
2)
3)
1) 2)
4)
9) 7)
4)
Hook
(3) Pull the copy lamp unit toward you to remove the harness.
10)
6)
3)
4)
2)
5)
8)
3)
1)
1)
2)
3)
(4) Remove the screw (4 pc) and remove the cover.
7 – 3
AR-F151
(5) Remove the screws (2 pcs.), the harness, and the optical unit. 4. Fusing section
1)
A. List
No. Part name Ref.
1 Thermistor
4)
2 PPD2 sensor
3)
3 Heater lamp
2) 5) 4 Pressure roller
5 Heat roller
(1) Remove the connectors (3 pcs.) of the rear cabinet.
(2) Open the side cover, remove two screws, and remove the fusing
unit.
When installing the lens unit, refer to “8-6. Lens unit installation refer-
ence.”
C. Assembly procedure 1)
Basically reverse the disassembly procedure.
The mirror base drive wire and the lens drive wire stretching methods
are described below.
a. Mirror base drive wire stretching
1. Hook the metal fixture of the mirror base drive wire on the
projection of the optical base plate.
2. Pass the wire through the external groove of the double pulley.
(At that time, check that No. 2/3 mirror unit is in contact with the
mirror base positioning plate.)
3. Hold so that the winding pulley groove is up, and wind the mirror 3)
2)
base drive wire 9 turns.
4. Put the 8th turn of the mirror base drive wire in the winding pul-
ley groove and fix with a screw.
5. Pass the wire under Mo. 2/3 mirror unit plate and wind it around
pulley A.
6. Pass the wire through the internal groove of the double pulley,
and pass through pulley B.
7. Hook the spring hook on the optical base plate.
2)
6 Wind closely
2
5
7
(3) Cut the binding band, remove the screw, and remove the thermis-
tor.
7
2
6
1)
3
6
6
6
5 1
6 1
3
2)
Wind closely
4
2
After installing the mirror base drive wire, be sure to perform main
scanning direction image distortion adjustment. Thermistor 3)
7 – 4
AR-F151
(4) Remove the screw and remove the U-turn guide. (7) Remove the plate spring on the right and remove the heater lamp.
1)
2)
1)
2)
Pressure roller section disassembly

(5) Remove the three screws, remove the fusing cover lower on the Hearter lamp
right side, and open the heat roller section.
2)
3) 4)
(8) Remove the spring and remove the separation pawls (3 pcs.).
6)
3)
5) 1)
2)
6)
5)
(6) Remove the screw and remove the PPD2 sensor.
1) 1)
(9) Remove the E-ring and remove the reverse gate.
2)
PPD2 sensor
3)
1)
2)
7 – 5
AR-F151
(10) Remove the pressure release levers on the right and the left (6) Remove the C-ring and the fusing bearing, and remove the heat
sides. roller.
1)
2) 3) Heat roller
1)
1)
(7) Remove the parts from the heat roller.

Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with ✽.
(11) Remove the pressure roller, the pressure bearing, and the spring.
Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with ✽. ✽
Pressure roller
✽ 3)
1)
2)
3) ✽ 1)
2)
1)
2)
(8) Remove two screws and remove the thermo unit.

3)
1)
Heat roller disassembly

(Continued from procedure (4).)
(5) Remove screws, remove the fusing cover, and open the heat roller
section.
3)
2)
2) 1)
3)
3)
2)
7 – 6
AR-F151
5. Tray paper feed/transport section (3) Remove two screws and remove the toner motor.
A. List
No. Part name Ref.
1 PPD1 sensor PWB
2 LSU unit
3 Intermediate frame unit
4 Paper feed roller
2)
(1) Remove six connectors and screws of the main PWB, and lift the
optical unit and the main PWB to remove.
2) 2)
1)
2)
(4) Remove two springs and open the intermediate frame unit.
2)
1)
3)
1)
1)
2)
(2) Remove the PWB insulation mylar and remove the paper transport
detection sensor (PPD2).
2)
1)
3)
7 – 7
AR-F151
(5) Remove the pulleys on the both sides and remove the paper exit (7) Release the belt pulley (a) lock and remove the belt pulley bearing.
roller.
3) 2)
3)
1)
4)
2)
1)
(8) Remove the paper exit roller.
(6) Pull out the paper exit roller knob and remove the belt.
2)
1)
7 – 8
AR-F151
(9) Remove the harness guide. (11) Remove the parts as shown below, and remove the pressure
release solenoid and the paper feed solenoid.
3)
4)
2)
1)
(10) Remove five screws and remove the main drive plate and the 1)
belt. 4)
2) 3)
2)
1)
(12) Remove six screws and remove the LSU unit.
2)
3)
1) 1)
1)
CAUTION:Attach
the gears
securely
7 – 9
AR-F151
(13) Remove two screws and remove the fusing connector. (17) Remove three screws and remove the TC front paper guide.
(14) Remove five screws and the connector, and lift the intermediate
frame unit to remove. 1)
3)
4)
2)
2)
(18) Remove the screw and the connector, and remove the PPD1
2) sensor PWB.
1)
1)
(15) Remove the screw and the E-ring, and remove the PS semi-cir-
cular earth plate and the PS roller unit.
2)
(16) Remove the E-ring and remove the spring clutch from the PS
roller unit.
5)
4)
PS roller unit
4)
PS semi-circuler
earth plate 1)
2)
3)
7 – 10
AR-F151
(19) Remove two E-rings and remove the paper feed roller. 6. Manual paper feed section
(20) Remove three E-rings and remove the clutch unit.
A. List
No. Part name Ref.
Back 1 Manual transport roller
5)
2 Cassette detection switch
3 PPD1 sensor PWB
Clutch unit 4 Side door detection unit

4)
Paper feed B. Disassembly procedure

roller Single unit
(1) Remove the screw and remove the single upper cover.
1)
4)
3)
Front
1)
2)
2)
7 – 11
AR-F151
(2) Remove the screw and remove the side door detection unit. (4) Remove the PPD1 sensor PWB.
1) 2)
3)
2)
1)
Back Wire treatment
(3) Remove three screws and remove the single manual feed upper
frame.
1)
Wire treatment
1)
(5) Remove the E-ring and remove the manual paper feed transport
roller.
2) 4)
3)
3)
1)
2)
7 – 12
AR-F151
(6) Remove the cassette detection switch. Multi unit

(1) Remove the screw and remove the multi upper cover.
1)
1)
3)
3)
2)
2)
Wire treatment
(2) Remove the screw and remove the side door detection unit.
(7) Remove the multi cover.

Orange
Multi cover
Red
1)
2)
1)
Back Wire treatment
7 – 13
AR-F151
(3) Remove three screws and remove the multi paper feed upper (5) Remove three E-rings and remove the manual paper feed roller
frame. B9.
1)
1)
1)
1)
1)
2)
3)
2)
L O CK
T O
K
(4) Remove two screws and remove the multi feed bracket unit from
the multi paper feed upper frame.
(6) Remove the pick-up roller.
2)
1)
1) 1)
2)
2)
7 – 14
AR-F151
(7) Cut the binding band and remove the multi paper feed solenoid. 7. Rear frame section
A. List
1)
No. Part name Ref.
1 Mirror motor
2 Main motor
3 Exhaust fan motor
(1) Remove three screws and remove the rear cabinet.
1)
3) 2)
Multi paper feed 2)
solnoid 1)
1)
(2) Remove two screws, the harness, and the mirror motor.
D. Pressure plate holder attachment
(1) Attach the pressure plate holder so that the resin section is not
covered with the seal M1-N.
Seal M1-N
Pressure plate
holder
Attachment
reference
3)
1)
2)
Attachment
reference
2)
7 – 15
AR-F151
(3) Remove two screws and one harness, and remove the main 8. Power section
motor.
A. List
No. Part name Ref.
1 Power PWB
(1) Remove two screws and one connector, and remove the power
PWB.
3)
2) 1)
1)
2)
3)
2)
(4) Remove two screws and one connector, and remove the exhaust For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
fan motor.
9. SPF section
No. Part name Ref.
A Sensor PWB
B Pickup solenoid
C Clutch
D Manual paper feed roller, pickup roller
E Belt
F SPF motor
G Paper entry sensor
H PS roller
1)
I Paper exit roller
Pickup unit removal

1) Remove three fixing pawls from the bottom of the machine.
2) Remove the front cover and the rear cover.
3)
2
1
7 – 16
AR-F151
1) Remove the belt, the paper feed frame SP, and two harnesses. B. Pickup solenoid
2) Remove the pickup unit.
1) Remove two screws.
2) Remove the pickup solenoid
1
2
1
1
2
3
4
3
A
1 1
∗ When installing, hang iron core A on the solenoid arm.
C. Clutch
1) Remove the E-ring.
∗ When installing the parts, be careful of the hole position of the paper 2) Remove the pulley and bush.
frame SP. 3) Slide the bush in the arrow direction.
4) Lift the clutch, and 5) remove the clutch.
A. Sensor PWB
1) Remove two screws from the bottom of the pickup unit.
2) Remove the upper cover.
2 1
2
5
3 4
1
1
1) Remove two screws. 1) Remove the E-ring.

2) Remove the sensor PWB. 2) Remove the parts.
3) Remove the harness.
1 1
3 1
7 – 17
AR-F151
D. Manual paper feed roller, pickup roller E. Belt

1) Lift the paper stopper. 1) Remove the belt.
2) Slide the takeup roller unit.
3) Slide the bush in the arrow direction.
4) Remove the takeup roller unit.
F. SPF motor
2 1) Remove the harness.
4
2) Remove four screws.
3) Remove the drive unit.
4) Remove the belt.
6) Remove the SPF motor. 6
3 2
1
5
∗ When installing the takeup roller, hang the projection of the takeup
roller unit on the solenoid arm. 5 2
1) Remove the parts.
2) Remove the manual paper feed roller. 3
4
3) Remove the pickup roller.
4
3
1
G. Paper entry sensor

2
1) Loosen the screw.
1 2) Open the paper exit PG.
3) Remove the paper entry sensor.
Transport unit removal 4) Remove the harness.
2) Remove the document tray unit.
3) Remove five screws.
4) Remove the transport unit.
3
1
3
3
3
3
1
4 1
2
7 – 18
AR-F151
H. PS roller 1) Open the right cabinet.

2) Remove three screws.
2) Remove the PS roller. 3) Remove one connector.
4) While tilting down the 2nd connection arm A, pull and remove the
paper feed unit toward you.
C
D
1
D
2
1
I. Paper exit roller 4 3

2) Remove the paper exit roller. B
A
1
∗ When installing, securely insert two bosses C on the machine side

1 and two bosses D on the paper feed unit side. Be sure to fix the
earth B.
∗ Insert the 2nd page feed.
A. Paper sensor
2 1) Remove the pawl.
2) Remove the paper sensor.
10. 2nd cassette section 2
No. Part name Ref.
3
A Paper sensor
B Cassette detection SW
C Paper feed solenoid
D Transport roller
E Paper feed clutch
F 2nd paper feed roller
Paper feed unit removal 1

1) Remove the screw.
2) Remove the rear cover.
∗ When installing, engage the pawl and install the unit.
2 1
A
7 – 19
AR-F151
B. Cassette detection SW E. Paper feed clutch

1) Remove the pawl. 1) Remove the E-ring.
2) Remove the cassette detection SW. 2) Remove the paper feed clutch.
3) Remove the harness. 3) Remove the parts.
A
2
3
1
C. Paper feed solenoid 3

2) Remove the connector.
3) Remove the paper feed solenoid. 2
3
∗ When installing, fit the cut surface A.
F. 2nd paper feed roller

1) Remove the E-ring and the parts.
2) Remove the 2nd paper feed roller.
1 1
D. Transport roller
1) Remove two E-rings. B
2) Remove the transport roller.
4
2
1
C 1
D
A
B 3
2
∗ When installing, hang the 2nd connection arm on the 2nd connec-
tion arm SP B. Be sure to install so that the earth spring C is in con-
∗ Install so that the earth spring A is brought into contact over bearing
tact under the bearing D.
B.
7 – 20
AR-F151
11. DUP motor section (AR-155 only) D. Remove the DUP motor.
A. Remove the rear cabinet. 2) Remove the DUP motor cover.
1) Remove four screws. 3) Remove the DUP motor.
2) Remove the rear cabinet.
1
3 1
2 2
1
1 Note: When reassembling, be sure to engage the DUP motor gear

B. Remove the shield plate. with the belt on the main body side.
1) Remove six screws. 12. Reverse roller section (AR-155 only)

2) Remove the open/close detection unit, and the earth wire.
3) Remove the shield plate. A. Remove the reverse unit.
1) Remove four screws
2) Remove the spring, and the earth wire
3) Remove the reverse unit.
3
2
2
1
C. Remove the main PWB.

1) Remove six screws. 3
2) Remove connectors.
3) Remove the main PWB. 1
B. Remove the reverse roller.

1) Bend the reverse roller and remove it.
2
3
2 2
2 2
1
2
1
7 – 21
AR-F151
13. RSPF section (AR-155 only) (3) Remove the RSPF.

1) Remove the connector and the cable.
A. RSPF 2) Remove the RSPF.
(1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Remove the rear cabinet.
1
2
2
1 1
(2) Remove the shield plate.

1) Remove six screws.
2) Remove the open/close detection unit, and the earth wire.
3) Remove the shield plate. B. Intermediate tray
1) Remove the intermediate tray.
3
2
C. Upper cover
1) Remove four screws from the bottom of the main body.
2 2) Remove the upper cover.
2
1
1
1
1
7 – 22
AR-F151
D. Pickup unit F. Sensor PWB

1) Remove the belt, the paper feed frame spring, and two harnesses. 1) Remove two screws.
2) Remove the pickup unit. 2) Remove the sensor PWB.
1
1 1
3
G. Pickup solenoid
1 1) Remove two screws.
2) Remove the pickup solenoid.
NOTE: When reassembling, be careful of the hole position for the 2

paper feed frame spring.
1
E. Upper cover of the pickup unit.
1) Remove two screws from the bottom of the pickup unit.
2) Remove the upper cover.
NOTE: When reassembling, hang the iron core on the solenoid arm.
1
7 – 23
AR-F151
H. Clutch I. Manual paper feed roller, pickup roller

(1) Remove the clutch unit. (1) Remove the pickup unit.
1) Remove the E-ring. 1) Lift the paper stopper.
2) Remove the pulley and the bush. 2) Slide the takeup roller unit.
3) Slide the bush in the arrow direction. 3) Slide the bush in the arrow direction.
4) Lift the clutch pawl. 4) Remove the takeup roller.
5) Remove the clutch unit.
2 1
1
2
4
3 4
(2) Remove the clutch NOTE: When reassembling, hang the convex portion of the roller unit
1) Remove the E-ring. on the solenoid arm.
(2) Remove the Manual paper feed roller, pickup roller.
2) Remove the manual paper feed roller.
3) Remove the pickup roller.
1
4
3
1
2
2 1
7 – 24
AR-F151
J. Transport unit removal L. Belt 2

1) Remove the harness. 1) Remove three screws.
2) Remove two screws. 2) Remove the drive unit.
3) Remove the document tray unit. 3) Remove
4) Remove five screws. 2 1
1
1
3
3
4
2 4
4
4
2
NOTE: When reassembling, hang the belt on the boss.
M. SPF motor
5 1) Remove the harness.
3) Remove the SPF motor.
3
K. Belt 1 1
1) Remove the belt.
N. Solenoid
3) Remove the solenoid.
3
2
7 – 25
AR-F151
O. Clutch (2) Remove the PS roller.

1) Cut the band with nippers.
2) Remove the harness. 2) Open the paper exit PG.
3) Remove the clutch.
4) Remove the PS roller.
3 1
2
4
2
3
Q. Paper entry sensor
1 2) Open the paper exit PG.
P. PS roller
(1) Remove the parts.
1) Remove the two screws. 1
1 2
1
2
7 – 26
AR-F151
R. Transport roller1. 1 S. Paper exit roller

(1) Remove the parts. (1) Remove the parts.
1) Remove the parts. 1) Remove two screws.
2 1
1
1
(2) Remove the parts. 1

2) Open the paper exit PG.
(2) Remove the paper feed PG upper.

2) Remove the paper feed PG upper.
2 1
(3) Remove the transport roller.

1) Remove the paper exit PG.
2) Remove the transport roller.
1
(3) Remove the paper exit roller.
2) Remove the paper exit roller.
1 2
7 – 27
AR-F151
T. Solenoid 14. FAX, MCU PWB section (AR-F151

(1) Remove the reverse gate only)
1) Remove the ring
2) Remove the reverse gate A. Remove the rear cover.
2) Hold the SPF sensor.
3) Remove the rear cover.
1
1
2
2
1
3
1
B. Remove the PWB cover FAX2.

1) Remove five screws.
NOTE: When reassembling, be careful of the groove and the hole 2) Remove the PWB cover FAX2.
positions of the spring.
NOTE: When reassembling, hang 2) on the solenoid.
(2) Remove the solenoid.

2) Remove the solenoid.
2
1
1
2
1 1
C. Remove the FAX PWB.

Remove the connector.
1) Remove seven screws.
2) Remove the FAX PWB.
1
2 1
7 – 28
AR-F151
D. Remove the PWB cover FAX. B. Remove the metal fixtures.

1) Remove six screws. 1) Disconnect the connector.
2) Remove the PWB cover FAX. 2) Remove four screws.
3) Remove the metal fixtures F and R.
1
2
3
2
3
1
1
1
2
1
E. Remove the MCU PWB. C. Remove the FAX operation panel.

1) Remove the belt, the screw, and two connectors.
Disconnect the connectors.
2) Remove the FAX operation panel.
1) Remove seven screws.
2) Remove the MCU PWB.
4) Remove U-turn PG.
2
3
4
1 1
3 1
1
2 1
15. FAX-SPF section (AR-F151 only)

A. Remove the front and the rear covers. Wiring
1) Disengage three pawls.
2) Remove the front and the rear covers.
7 – 29
AR-F151
D. Remove the FAX operation panel unit. G. Remove the PU solenoid

1) Remove five screws. 1) Remove two screws.
2) Remove the FAX operation panel unit. 2) Remove the PU solenoid.
2 2
1 1
E. Remove the Fax panel PWB. H. Remove the clutch unit.

1) Remove eleven screws. 1) Remove the E-ring.
2) Remove the FAX panel PWB. 2) the pulley, and the bushing.
3) Remove the connector. 3) Slide the bushing in the arrow direction.
4) Lift the clutch pawl.
5) Remove the clutch unit.
1
2
5 3
3
4
1
F. Remove the FAX sensor PWB.

2) Remove the FAX sensor PWB.
3) Remove the connector. I. Remove the clutch
1) Remove the E-ring.
1 1
3
1
7 – 30
AR-F151
J. Remove the pickup unit. M. Remove the belt.

1) Lift the paper stopper. 1) Remove the belt.
2) Slide the pickup roller unit in the arrow direction.
3) Slide the bushing.
4) Remove the pickup roller unit.
3 1
2 4
A
1
N. Remove the SPF motor.

(Note) When installing, hang the projection of the roller unit on the 1) Remove the connector.
solenoid arm. 2) Remove four screws.
3) Remove the drive frame.
K. Remove the manual feed roller and the pickup 4) Remove the belt.
roller. 5) Remove two screws.
1) Remove the parts. 6) Remove the SPF motor.
2) Remove the manual feed roller. 6
3) Remove the pickup roller and the parts.
2
1
4
1 5
3
5 2
3
4
1
2
L. Remove the transport unit.

1) Remove the connector.
3) Remove the document tray unit.
2 3 1 3
3
(Note) When installing, attach the belt as shown in the figure.
3
7 – 31
AR-F151
O. Remove the paper entry sensor. Q. Remove the paper exit roller.
1) Loosen the screw. 1) Remove the parts.
2) Open the paper exit PG. 2) Remove the paper exit roller.
4) Remove the connector. 1
16. Procedures after replacement of FAX

ROM (AR-F151 only)
After replacement of FAX ROM, perform the following procedures.
● Perform the FAX software switch clear and the FAX image
memory clear.
1) FAX software clear procedure

1 On the Fax operation panel: FUNCTION → 9 → ∗ → 8 → # →
ENTER → 0 → 2 → 1
2 2) FAX image memory clear procedure
On the FAX operation panel: FUNCTION → 9 → ∗ → 8 → # →
ENTER → 1 → 0 → 1
(Note)
P. Remove the PS roller. When the ROM version is upgraded, the area used by each job
1) Remove the parts. for D-RAM memory area may vary. Therefore, this procedure
2) Remove the PS roller. must be performed after repalcement of ROM to stabilize the
operation.
Perform this procedure immediately after turning OFF/ON the
power after replacement of ROM.
7 – 32
AR-F151
d. Adjustment procedure
[8] Adjustment
1) Remove the right cabinet (manual paper feed unit), the docu-
1. Optical section ment reference plate.
A. Image distortion adjustment 2) Remove the document glass.
There are following two types of image distortion.
● Horizontal image distortion
● Vertical image distortion
In this machine, the image distortion is adjusted by changing the paral-
lelism of mirrors (copy lamp unit, No. 2/3 mirror unit).
(1) Horizontal image distortion adjustment

a. Summary
1)
Parallelism of mirrors can be made by installing the copy lamp unit
and No. 2/3 mirror unit to the reference position. However, it must
be checked by making a copy, and must be adjusted if necessary. 2)
3)
b. Cases when the adjustment is required
1) When the copy lamp unit and No.2/3 mirror unit are disas-
sembled or their part is replaced.
2) When the copy lamp unit and No.2/3 mirror unit drive section is
disassembled or its part is replaced.
3) When the copy image is distorted as shown below:
3) Loosen the fixing screw of the copy lamp unit wire.
Document Copy A Copy B
c. Necessary tools
● Screwdriver (+)
● Hex wrench
● Scale
● Test chart for distortion adjustment (Make a chart shown below
by yourself.)
Draw a rectangle on a paper (B4 or 8 1/2″ × 14″) as shown
below.
Be sure to make four right angles.
L L
L = 10mm
L
Fixing Screws
4) Manually turn the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit drive gear to
bring No.2/3 mirror unit into contact with No.2/3 mirror unit
positioning plate. When No.2/3 mirror unit makes contact with
No.2/3 mirror unit positioning plate in the rear frame side simul-
taneously, the mechanical parallelism of No.2/3 mirror unit is
proper.
If one side of No.2/3 mirror unit makes contact with No.2/3 mir-
ror unit positioning plate and the other side does not, the paral-
lelism is improper.
If the parallelism is improper, perform the procedure of step 5).
8 – 1
AR-F151
7) Manually turn the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit drive gear to
bring No.2/3 mirror unit into contact with the positioning plate,
and perform the procedure of step 4).
Repeat procedures of steps 4) to 7) until the parallelism of
No.2/3 mirror unit is properly set.
8) With No.2/3 mirror unit positioning plate in contact with No.2/3
mirror unit, bring the copy lamp unit into contact with the right
frame and fix the copy lamp unit to the drive wire.
Procedures 1) to 8) are for adjustment of mechanical horizontal
parallelism. The copy lamp unit and No.2/3 mirror are fixed to
the specified positions and the mechanical horizontal parallelism
of No.2/3 mirror is adjusted.
Then the optical horizontal parallelism must be adjusted in the
following procedures.
Copy lamp unit projection
5) Loosen the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit drive pulley

setscrew in the side where No.2/3 mirror unit does not make
contact with No.2/3 mirror unit positioning plate.
Set screw
9) Set the image distortion check chart on the document table, and
make a reduction copy (75%) on an A4 or 11″ × 8 1/2″ paper
with the document cover open.
Scanner unit drive pulley
6) Without moving the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit drive pul-
ley shaft, manually turn the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit 50mm
drive pulley in the same direction of the loosened setscrew.
When it makes contact with No.2/3 mirror unit positioning plate,
tighten and fix the setscrew.
Image distortion check chart
8 – 2
AR-F151
10) Check the horizontal image distortion. (2) Vertical image distortion adjustment
If LL = LR, there is no horizontal distortion a. Summary
In this adjustment, the left and right balance is adjusted by changing
LL and LR: Distance between the copy the left and right balance of the No. 2 scanner unit frame on the
image horizontal line and front frame side.
the edge of the black
LL LR background. b. Note
● Horizontal image distortion adjustment
Black background
c. Cases when the adjustment is required
1) When the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit drive section is dis-
assembled or its part is replaced.
2) When the copy image is distorted as follows:
11) If LL is not equal to LR, perform the following procedure.

Loosen the setscrew of the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit
drive pulley in the front or the rear frame.
Document Copy C Copy D
Set screw
d. Necessary tools
● Screwdriver (+)
● Screwdriver (–)
● Scale
● Test chart for distortion adjustment (Make by yourself.)
Draw a rectangle on A4 or 8 1/2″ × 11″ paper as shown below:
Be sure to make four right angles.
Scanner unit drive pulley L L
12) Without moving the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit drive pul- L = 10mm
ley shaft, manually turn the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit
L
drive pulley whose setscrew was loosened, and adjust the
parallelism of copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit.
e. Adjustment procedure
1) Set the test chart for image distortion adjustment on the docu-
ment glass, and make a normal copy on a paper of A4 or 8 1/2″
× 11″.
2) Check image distortion in the right and the left sides.
If the both vertical lines are in parallel with each other, the right-
left distortion balance is proper. (However, there may be some
distortion.)
2) If all the four angles are right angles, there in no distortion and
the following procedures are not required.
Smaller distortion
Greater distortion
13) Tighten the set screw of the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit
drive pulley.
14) Check the image distortion in the same manner as step 10).
Repeat procedures 11) to 14) until horizontal image distortion
is eliminated.
8 – 3
AR-F151
3) If the right-left distortion balance is improper, loosen the fixing (1) Outline
screw of No.2/3 mirror unit rail to change and adjust the right-left The main scanning (front/rear) direction magnification ratio adjust-
balance of No.2/3 mirror unit rail. ment is made automatically or manually.
Automatic adjustment: The width of the reference line marked on
the shading correction plate is scanned to perform the main scan-
ning (front/rear) direction magnification ratio adjustment automat-
ically.
Manual adjustment: The adjustment is made by manual key opera-
tions. (In either of the automatic and manual adjustments, the zoom
data register set value is changed for adjustment.)
The magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is adjusted by
changing the mirror base (scanner) scanning speed.
(2) Main scanning direction magnification ratio adjustment
a. Note
Before performing this adjustment, the following adjustments must
have been completed. If not, this adjustment cannot be performed
properly.
● Image distortion adjustment
● The lens unit must be installed in the reference position.
b. Cases when the adjustment is required

1) When the lens and the mirror unit are disassembled or the part
(Note) is replaced.
If the distortion in the lead edge side (when viewed in the paper 2) When the copy lamp unit/No.2/3 mirror unit drive section is dis-
transport direction) is greater, change the height of the left rail of assembled or the part is replaced.
No.2/3 mirror unit.
If the distortion in the rear edge side (when viewed in the paper 3) When the main PWB is replaced.
transport direction) is greater, change the height of the right rail 4) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced.
of No.2/3 mirror unit.
5) When “U2” trouble occurs.
6) When the copy image distortion adjustment is performed.
c. Necessary tools
● Screwdriver (+)
● Scale
Change the height of the right side of the rail.
1) Set the scale vertically on the document table. (Use a long scale
for precise adjustment.)
Change the height of the left side of the rail.
4) Make a copy to check the vertical image distortion.

If the four angles are right angles, the adjustment is completed.
B. Copy magnification ratio adjustment

The copy magnification ratio must be adjusted in the main scanning
direction and in the sub scanning direction. To adjust, use SIM 48-1.
2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%.

3) Make a copy on A4 or 81⁄2″ × 11″ paper.
8 – 4
AR-F151
4) Measure the length of the copied scale image. 5) Calculate the main scanning direction magnification ratio.
Main scanning direction magnification ratio
Copy image dimensions
= × 100 (%)
Original dimension
(When a 100mm scale is used as the original.)

Original (Scale)
HARDDENCD
STAINLESS
JAPAN
mm
1/2mm 10 20 100 110 120 130 140 150
Shizuoka
HARDDENCD
STAINLESS
JAPAN
Paper feed mm
direction 1/2mm 10 20 100 110 120 130 140 150
Shizuoka
Reference Comparison point Copy
110
6) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified b. Cases when the adjustment is required
range. If it is not within the specified range, perform the following
1) When the lens and the mirror unit are disassembled or the part
procedures.
is replaced.
7) Execute SIM 48-1 to select the main scanning direction copy
2) When the scanner unit drive section is disassembled or the part
magnification ratio adjustment mode.
is replaced.
To select the adjustment mode, use the copy mode select key.
3) When the main PWB is replaced.
In the case of the automatic adjustment, when the PRINT switch is 4) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced.
pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the white plate for shading 5) When “U2” trouble occurs.
to scan the width of the reference line, calculating the correction
6) When the copy image distortion adjustment is performed.
value and displaying and storing this value.
After execution of the automatic adjustment, go out from the simula- c. Necessary tools
tion mode and make a copy to check the magnification ratio. ● Screwdriver (+)
If the magnification ratio is not in the specified range (100 ±1.0%), ● Scale
manually adjust as follows.
Adjustment mode Lighting lamp 1) Set the scale on the document table as shown below. (Use a
Main scanning direction auto long scale for precise adjustment.)
Auto exposure lamp
copy magnification ratio
ON
adjustment
Main scanning direction manual
Manual exposure lamp
copy magnification ratio
ON
adjustment
Sub scanning direction copy Photo exposure lamp
magnification ratio adjustment ON
8) Set the adjustment mode to Manual with the copy mode select
key.
9) Enter the new set value of main scanning direction copy mag-
nification ratio with the copy quantity set key, and press the
COPY button.
10) Change the set value and repeat the adjustment until the ratio
is within the speoified range.
When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ration
is changed by 0.1%.
(3) Sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio 2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%.
3) Make a copy on A4 or 81⁄2″ × 11″ paper.
a. Note
Before performing this adjustment, the following adjustments must 4) Measure the length of the copied scale image.
have been completed. If not, this adjustment cannot be performed 5) Calculate the sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio.
properly. Sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio
● Image distortion adjustment
= Copy image dimension × 100 (%)
● Must be installed to the lens unit reference position. Original dimension
8 – 5
AR-F151
110
Original (Scale)
HARDDENCD
STAINLESS
JAPAN
mm
1/2mm 10 20 100 110 120 130 140 150
Shizuoka
HARDDENCD Paper feed

JAPAN
STAINLESS direction
mm
1/2mm 10 20 100 110 120 130 140 150
Shizuoka
Reference Comparison point Copy
6) Check that the actual copy magnification ratio is within the D. Image position adjustment
specified range. (100 ± 1.0%).
There are following five kinds of image position adjustments, which are
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro- made by laser control except for the image scan start position adjust-
cedures.
ment. For the adjustments, SIM 50 – 01 and SIM 50 – 10 are used.
7) Execute SIM 48-1 to select the sub scanning direction copy
magnification ratio adjustment mode. No. Adjustment item Simulation
To select the adjustment mode, use the copy mode select key. 1 Print start position 50 – 01
(Photo exposure lamp ON)
2 Image lead edge void amount 50 – 01
8) Enter the new set value of sub scanning direction copy mag-
nification ratio with the copy quantity set key, and press the 3 Image scan start position 50 – 01
COPY button. 4 Image rear edge void amount 50 – 01
Repeat procedures 1) — 8) until the sub scanning direction actual
5 Center offset 50 – 10
copy magnification ratio in 100% copying is within the specified
range. To select the adjustment mode with SIM 50 – 01, use the copy density
When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ration is select key.
changed by 0.1%. The relationship between the adjustment modes and the lighting lamps
are as shown in the table below.
C. Lens unit attachment reference
Attach the lens unit so that the lens unit number on the lens adjustment Adjustment mode Lighting lamp
plate is aligned with the scribe line on the base plate.
Print start position Auto (AE) lamp
Image lead edge void amount Manual (TEXT) lamp
Lens unit number
Image scan start position Photo lamp
Auto, Manual, Photo
Image rear edge void amount
lamps
To select the adjustment mode with SIM 50 – 10, use the copy mode
(–) direction select key.
Reference line (0) The relationship between the adjustment modes and the lighting
lamps are as shown in the table below.
(+) direction
Machine with the multi manual paper feed unit
Adjustment mode Lighting lamp

Example: Lens unit number –2.8 Print center offset (cassette) Auto, Cassette
Attach the lens unit at 2 scales in the paper exit direction Print center offset (manual feed) Auto, Manual
from the reference line.
Note: Never touch the other screws than the unit attachment Document center offset Auto, Manual
screw.
The lens unit is supplied only in a whole unit. Machine with the single manual paper feed unit
Print center offset (cassette) Auto, Cassette

Print center offset (manual feed) Auto
Document center offset Auto, Manual
8 – 6
AR-F151
(1) Lead edge adjustment 3) Make a copy and measure the void amount of image rear edge.
1) Set a scale to the center of the paper lead edge guide as shown
below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2″ × 14″ paper.
Void amount (Standard value: 2 – 3mm)
Scale image
Paper rear edge
2) Execute SIM 50 – 01
3) Set the print start position (AE lamp ON) (A), the lead edge void 4) If the measurement value is out of the specified range, change the
amount (TEXT lamp ON) (B), and the scan start position (PHOTO set value and repeat the adjustment procedure.
lamp ON) (C) to 0, and make a copy of a scale at 100%. The default value is 50.
4) Measure the image loss amount (R mm) of the scale image. Note: The rear edge void cannot be checked with the first sheet
Set C = 10 × R (mm). (Example: Set the value of C to 30.) after entering the simulation mode, the first sheet after turn-
When the value of C is increased by 10, the image loss is ing off/on the power, or the first sheet after inserting the cas-
decreased by 1mm. (Default: 50) sette. Use the second or later sheet to check the rear edge
5) Measure the distance (H mm) between the paper lead edge and void.
the image print start position.
Set A = 10 × H (mm). (Example: Set the value of A to 50.) (3) Center offset adjustment
When the value of A is increased by 10, the image lead edge is 1) Set the self-made test chart for the center position adjustment so
shifted to the paper lead edge by 1mm. (Default: 50) that its center line is aligned with the center mark of the document
6) Set the lead edge void amount to B = 50 (2.5mm). guide.
When the value of B is increased by 10, the void amount is in- ● Test chart for the center position adjustment
creased by about 1mm. For 25 or less, however, the void amount Draw a line at the center of A4 or 8 1/2″ × 11″ paper in the
becomes zero. (Default: 50) paper transport direction.
(Example) Document guide

Distance between paper lead
edge and image: H = 5mm
Image loss:
R = 3mm Center
Copy paper
(A4 or 8 1/2″ × 11″)
5mm
2) Execute SIM 50 – 10 to select the print center offset (cassette

10mm
paper feed) adjustment mode.
The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity display.
3) Make a copy and check that the copied center line is properly posi-
tioned.
(2) Image rear edge void amount adjustment The standard value is 0 ± 2mm from the paper center.
1) Set a scale to the rear edge section of A4 or 11″ × 8 1/2″ paper
size as shown in the figure below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2″ ×
2.0mm or less
14″ paper. (Copy A)
Copy image
B4 or 8 1/2″ × 14″ paper
Copy paper
Shift folding line
A4 size rear edge

2.0mm or less
(Copy B)
Copy image
Copy paper
Shift folding line
(Paper feed direction)

2) Execute SIM 50 – 01 to select the image rear edge void amount ad-
justment mode.
The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity display.
8 – 7
AR-F151
4) If the measured value is out of the specified range, change the set E. Copy density adjustment procedure
value and repeat the adjustment procedure.
Use SIM 46-01 to set the copy density for each copy mode.
When the set value is increased by 1, the copy image is shifted by For selection of modes, use the copy mode select key.
0.1mm toward the rear frame.
● For the manual paper feed, change the manual paper feed ad-
(1) Test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) setting
justment mode and perform the similar procedures. 1) Place the test chart so that its edge is aligned with the A4 (Letter)
● Since the document center offset is automatically adjusted by
reference line on the document table. Then place a B4 (14″ × 8
the CCD which scan the reference lines (F/R) on the back of
1/2″) white paper on the test chart and close the document cover.
document guide, there is no need to adjust manually.
2. Copy density adjustment

A. Copy density adjustment timing
The copy density adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
● When maintenance is performed.
● When the developing bias/grid bias voltage is adjusted.
● When the optical section is cleaned. White paper
● When a part in the optical section is replaced.
● When the optical section is disassembled.
● When the OPC drum is replaced.
● When the main control PWB is replaced.
● When the EEPROM on the main control PWB is replaced.
● When the memory trouble (U2) occurs.
B. Note for copy density adjustment

1) Arrangement before execution of the copy density adjustment Test chart
● Clean the optical section.
● Clean or replace the charger wire.
● Check that the voltage at the high voltage section and the develop-
ing bias voltage are in the specified range.
C. Necessary tool for copy density adjustment

● One of the following test charts:
UKOG-0162FCZZ, UKOG-0089CSZZ, KODAK GRAY SCALE
● B4 (14″ × 8 1/2″) white paper (2) Perform the adjustment in each mode.
● The user program AE setting should be “3.” 1) Execute SIM 46-1.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the exposure mode select key.
Set the exposure level to 3 for all adjustment. (Except for the auto
mode.)
(1) (2)
Test chart comparison table
UKOG-
0162FCZZ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
DENSITY No.
UKOG- (1) Mode select key/display
0089CSZZ 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.9 0 lamp
DENSITY No.
(2) Exposure level select
KODAK GRAY key/display lamp
1 2 3 4 19 A
SCALE
D. Features of copy density adjustment

For the copy density adjustment, the image data shift function provided
in the image process LSI is used. Ex-
Adjustment Exposure mode Sharp gray chart
posure
List of the adjustment modes mode display lamp adjustment level
level
Auto Mode Brightness 1 step only “3” is slightly
Auto mode Auto lamp ON —
copied.
Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the
Manual Mode “3” is slightly
center brightness is made. Manual mode Manual lamp ON 3
copied.
Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the
Photo Mode “3” is slightly
center brightness is made. Photo mode Photo lamp ON 3
copied.
Manual T/S Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the
Manual T/S Manual lamp/Photo “4” is slightly
mode center brightness is made. 3
mode lamp ON copied.
T/S Auto mode Brightness 1 step only
Auto T/S Auto lamp/Photo “4” is slightly
3
mode lamp ON copied.
8 – 8
AR-F151
3) Make a copy. B. DV bias adjustment

Check the adjustment level (shown in the above table) of the ex-
Note:
posure test chart (Sharp Gray Scale). ● A digital multi meter with internal resistance of 1GΩ must be
use for correct adjustment.
Sharp Gray Scale adjustment level
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
Procedures
Non toner 1. Set the digital multi meter range to DC500V.
save mode Slightly copied. 2. Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN-10-1 (DV
Not copied. BIAS) and set the negative side to the connector CN10-2 (FG).
3. Execute SIM 8-1. (The developing bias is outputted for 30 sec.)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
4. Adjust the control volume (VR-121) so that the output voltage is –
Toner save 400 ±5V.
mode
Slightly copied.
Not copied.
(When too bright): Decrease the value displayed on the copy

quantity display.
(When too dark): Increase the value displayed on the copy quan-
tity display.
* The value can be set in the range of 1 — 99.
3. High voltage adjustment

A. Main charger (Grid bias)
Note:
● Use a digital multi meter with internal resistance of 10MΩ or
more measurement.
● After adjusting the grid LOW output, adjust the HIGH output.
Do not reverse the sequence.
Procedures
1. Set the digital multi meter range to DC700V.
2. Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN11-3 (GRID) 4. Duplex adjustment
of high voltage section of the power PWB and set the negative side
to the frame ground (radiating plate). A. Adjusting the paper reverse position in memory
3. Execute SIM 8-3. (The main charger output is supplied for 30 sec for duplex copying
in the grid voltage LOW output mode.) This step adjusts the front surface printing (odd-number pages of a
4. Adjust the control volume (VR-141) so that the output voltage is – document set) in the S-D mode copying and the leading edge position
400 ±20V. of an image on even-number pages in the D-S mode.
5. Execute SIM 8-2. (The main charger output is supplied for 30 sec That is, it covers the adjustment of the second surface printing mode
in the grid voltage HIGH output mode.) (image loss at the front edge of an image) in which image data is once
6. Adjust the control volume (VR-142) so that the output voltage is 580 stored in memory.
±10V. The image data is read, starting from its front end in the document
delivery direction (Reference direction of document setting in the OC
mode)and stored in memory.
This stored image data is printed starting at the printing start position,
in the order of last-stored data to the first-stored data.
In other words, the front edge image loss of the image can be adjusted
by changing the document read end position.
(Adjustment procedure)
1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side of
a sheet of A4 white paper or letter paper)
5 10
8 – 9
AR-F151
2) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown below, (Adjustment procedure)
in the S-D mode and the D-S mode. (1) Paper trailing edge void quantity
1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side of
Scale (S-D mode) Scale (D-S mode) a sheet of A/4 white paper or letter paper)
2) Set the test chart on the document glass as shown below.
Document guide The trailing edge has a scale
3) Execute simulation 50-18 to make a copy and check the front edge
image loss at the area where the scale is printed.
Adjust the setting so that the front edge image loss is less than 4.0
mm in the R-SPF mode.
An increase of 1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm in Table glass
image loss.
3) Using the user simulation [18], set the paper size of the first cas-
Front edge of paper sette.
Letter paper: 4
A4 paper: 3
The front edge of the 4) Execute simulation 50-19 to turn on the TEXT lamp and make the
scale on test chart Void area printing mode in OC-D mode.
Make a copy of the test chart to check the void area of the scale
on the image.
5 10
less than 4 mm
Void position to be check
Paper
The trailing edge void on the first printing surface

is shown above.
2nd printing surface where scale is printed (lower side)

Adjust the setting so that the void area is 4 - 5 mm.
An increase in 1 of setting represents 0.1 mm in void area.
(2) Image cut trailing edge void quantity (R-SPF)

B. Adjusting trailing edge void in duplex copyin 1) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown below.
mode
This is the adjustment of the first surface printing mode (rear end void)
in duplex copying.
In a duplex copying operation, the paper is delivered starting from the
rear end of the first printing surface. It is therefore necessary to make
a void area at the rear end on the first printing surface to prevent paper
jam at the fusing part.
There are two adjustment modes: Scale (D-D mode)
1) Image cut rear end void quantity (R-SPF) 50-19(AE)
The size (length) of a document read from the R-SPF is detected, 2) Execute simulation 50-19 to turn on the AE lamp and make the
the image at the trailing edge of the first printing surface is cut to printing mode in the D-D mode.
make a void area. (The adjustment of void quantity at the time 3) Remove and reinsert the cassette.
when the cassette paper size is not recognized.) NOTE: Make sure to carry out this step before making a copy
2) Paper trailing edge void quantity 50-19 (TEXT) during this adjustment.
This adjustment is made when the cassette paper size is recog- 4) Make a copy and check the void area of the scale on the image.
nized. The trailing edge void quantity can be adjusted by changing Adjust the setting so that the void area is 2 - 4 mm.
the trailing edge image laser OFF timing. An increase of 1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm in
The paper void quantity should be first adjusted before the image cut void area.
trailing edge void quantity (R-SPF) is adjusted. l Void position to be checked
8 – 10
AR-F151
5. Density section B. FAX mode density adjustment (Individual mode)

(<FAX mode> SIM 46-14 – 16)
A. FAX mode density adjustment (Overall mode)
1) Set the test chart (TRAP23109SCZZ CCITT #3 chart) on the OC
(<FAX mode> SIM 46-12) table as shown below, and close the OC cover.
1) Set the test chart (TRAP23109SCZZ <CCITT #3 chart>) on the
OC table as shown below, and close the OC cover.
A4
A4
A4
A4
Glass holding plate

Glass holding plate
2) Switch to the FAX mode and execute SIM 46-14 to 46-16
depending on the adjustment mode.
2) Switch to the FAX mode and execute SIM 46-12. 3) After warming up, shading is performed and the current density
3) After warming up, shading is performed and the current density level is displayed on the lower two digits of the display section.
level is displayed on the lower two digits of the display section 4) Enter the set value with the 10-key to adjust the FAX image den-
in standard and auto density mode. sity.
4) Enter the set value with the 10-key to adjust the FAX image den- 5) Make a copy, and adjust the density with the copy as a refer-
sity. ence.
5) Make a copy, and adjust so that the following adjustment
specification is satisfied. <Adjustment specifications>
When an adjustment is made in this mode, the exposure level for each
communication mode and each density mode are automatically ad- Reso-
Density Set
justed accordingly. lution SIM Set value
changeover range
mode
<Adjustment specifications> Fine Switched with FAX The greater the 1 – 99
the density mode set value is, the
CCITT #3
select key. 46-14 greater the
Density Resolution chart Set
SIM Set value density is, and
mode mode output range Super Switched with FAX
fine the density mode vice versa.
result
select key. 46-15
Auto Standard FAX “3” is The greater 1 – 99
mode slightly the set Ultra Switched with FAX
46-12 copied. value is, the fine the density mode
greater the select key. 46-16
density is,
and vice
versa.
8 – 11
AR-F151
6. Communication section 6) Start transmission from the line.
Note: These items are factory adjusted when shipping according to H:xx L:yy
FCC standards. Therefore, do not change the setting in the 1:YES 2:NO
market.
SENDING DTMF
A. Dial test (<FAX mode> SIM 66-13)
(1) Dial pulse transmission test
1) Execute SIM 66-13 in FAX mode. xx: High group soft SW set value
2) Execute the dial pulse mode according to the instructions on the yy: Low group soft SW set value
LCD display. Initial
SIM Soft SW Set value
SELECT SIGNAL value
1:PULSE 2:DTMF DTMF High (FAX SW53- 3.5dB SW set 0.5ms
trans- group mode) 1 – 4 (7) value: 0 – step
3) Set the make time. mission 66-13 15 (Binary
Low SW53- 3.5dB
INPUT MAKE TIME level group (Test 5 – 8 (7) Transmis- input)
only) sion level: 0
(0–15)
– 7.5db
4) Select the dial to be transmitted.
Default: 0123456789#
(After deleting with the clear key, it can be set to any desired
value.)
5) Transmission is started from the line.
SEND yyPPS xxm s

1:YES 2:NO
SENDING yyPPS xxm s
Initial
SIM Soft SW Set value
value
Dial 10 FAX SW67- 40ms SW set value: 1ms
pulse PPS mode 1 – 4 (14) 0 – 15 step
make 66-13 Make time: (Binary
time 25 – 41ms input)
(2) DTMF signal transmission level adjustment

1) Execute SIM 66-13 in the FAX mode.
2) Execute the DTMF mode according to the instructions on the
LCD display.
SELECT SIGNAL
1:PULSE 2:DTMF
3) Select the signal transmission level.
The signal transmission level is classified into two groups: the
high group, and the low group.
Transmission can be made with either of default and the soft
SW set value.
SELECT HIGH LEVEL

1:DEFAULT 2:SOFT SW.
SELECT LOW LEVEL

1:DEFAULT 2:SOFT SW.
4) The transmission level can be set when the following menu is
displayed on the LCD. (et value 1 = 0.5dB change)
INPUT VALUE
(0–15)
(This value is returned to the original value when the simulation
mode is canceled.)
5) Select the dial signal to be transmitted.
Default: 0123456789#
(After deleting with the clear key, it can be set to any desired value.)
8 – 12
AR-F151
[9] SIMULATION, FAX SOFTWARE SWITCH, TROUBLE CODES

1. List of simulations
The simulations for the AR-F151 (with Fax functions) are shown in bold fonts.
Sim Kind of Sub Sim Kind of Sub

Operation Operation
No. main code code No. main code code
01 Optical 01 Mirror scan operation 26 Various 01 Manual feed setup
system setup 02 SPF setup
02 SPF 02 SPF sensor status display 03 Second cassette setup
Individual 03 Motor ON 04 Machine duplex setup
load 04 Paper feed solenoid ON 06 Destination setup
operation 05 Pressure release solenoid ON 07 Machine conditions check
(RSPF) 20 Rear edge void setup
06 Resist clutch ON (RSPF) 30 CE mark conformity control
07 Gate solenoid ON (RSPF) ON/OFF setup
38 Cancel of stop at drum life over
05 Lamp ON 01 Operation panel display check 39 Memory capacity setup
check 02 Fusing lamp ON + Cooling fan 40 Polygon motor OFF time setup
HIGH/LOW speed 42 Transfer ON timing control setup
03 Copy lamp ON 43 Side void setup
06 Machine 01 Paper feed solenoid ON 44 SPF document rear edge read
individual 02 Resist solenoid ON setup (SC only)
load 47 FAX document rear edge scan
operation setup
07 Aging 01 Warm up display and aging with 30 Sensor 01 Paper sensor status display
jam operation
06 Intermittent aging check
(Standard
08 High 01 Developing bias
provision)
voltage 02 Main charger (Grid high)
output check 03 Grid voltage (Low) 43 Fusing 01 Normal copy
06 Transfer charger temperature 04 Fusing temperature setup 2
setup 05 Duplex mode fusing temperature
10 Other None Toner motor aging setup
14 Trouble None Cancel troubles other than U2 09 Postcard size paper fusing control
reset setup
16 U2 trouble None Cancel of U2 trouble 46 Exposure 01 Copy density adjustment
reset adjustment 12 FAX density overall adjustment
20 Maintenance 01 Maintenance counter clear 13 FAX density adjustment (Normal
counter mode)
clear 14 FAX density adjustment (Small
character mode)
21 Counter 01 Maintenance cycle setup 15 FAX density adjustment (Fine
setup mode)
(When 16 FAX density adjustment (Fine
maintenance) (300dpi) mode)
48 Magnification 01 Front/rear scan direction
22 Counter 01 Maintenance counter display ratio
display 02 Maintenance preset value display correction
04 Jam total counter display
05 Total counter display 50 Lead edge 01 Lead edge image position
08 SPF counter display adjustment adjustment
12 Drum counter display Paper lead edge/rear edge void
14 P-ROM version display adjustment
17 Copy counter display 10 Paper center offset +
18 Printer counter display OC/Document center offset +
20 FAX print counter display SPF document center offset
21 Scanner counter display 18 Memory reverse position
22 SPF jam total counter display adjustment
23 FAX reception counter display 19 Duplex copy rear edge void
24 FAX transmission counter adjustment
display 51 Timing 02 Resist quantity adjustment
24 Special 01 Jam total counter clear adjustment 06 SPF exposure correction
counter 04 SPF counter clear 61 Laser 03 Polygon motor check
clear 07 Drum counter clear system (HSYNC output check)
08 Copy counter clear operation
09 Printer counter clear
63 Shading 01 Shading check
10 FAX transmission/reception
counter clear 64 Self print 01 Self print only with the engine (1
11 FAX print counter clear by 2 mode)
13 Scanner counter clear 66 FAX PWB None Simulation on the FAX panel
14 SPF jam total counter clear check (For details, refer to the FAX
25 Main motor 01 Main motor system ON + Cooling simulation.)
ON fan low speed (For the duplex
model, the duplex motor is
simultaneously turned on.)
10 Polygon motor ON
9 – 1
AR-F151
2. Contents of simulations (new or revised simulations only)

Input method: Clear key → Exposure Select key → Clear key → Exposure Select key
Main code Sub code Content
01 01 Mirror scan operation
(Operation/Procedure)
1. When this simulation is executed, the mirror home position is detected.
Sensor name Display lamp
Mirror home position sensor OPC drum cartridge replacement lamp
2. When the _START key is pressed, scanning is executed at the speed corresponding to the currently set copy
magnification ratio.
The copy magnification ratio can be arbitrarily set with the magnification ratio select key/zoom key.
02 02 SPF sensor status display
ON/OFF of the sensors in the SPF can be checked with the following lamps.
Display Sensor
Developer cartridge replacement lamp Document set detection (SPID)
Jam lamp SPF document transport detection (SPPD)
Photoconductor cartridge replacement lamp SPF cover open detection (SCOD)
SPF jam lamp SPF open/close detection (SDSW)
FAX document size detection
Paper size detection
SPF lamp FAX/SPF B4 size detection (SB4D)
03 Motor ON
When the start key is pressed, the SPF motor rotates for 10 sec at the speed corresponding to the currently set
magnification ratio.
04 Paper feed solenoid ON
When the start key is pressed, the SPF paper feed solenoid repeats ON (500 ms) and OFF (500 ms) 20 times.
05 Pressure release solenoid ON (RSPF)
When the start key is pressed, the RSPF document transport solenoid (SPFS) repeats ON (500 ms) and OFF
(500 ms) 20 times.
06 Resist clutch ON (RSPF)
When the start key is pressed, the RSPF resist clutch (SRRC) repeats ON (500 ms) and OFF (500 ms) 20
times.
07 Gate solenoid ON (RSPF)
When the start key is pressed, the RSPF gate solenoid (SGS) repeats ON (500 ms) and OFF (500 ms) 20
times.
05 01 Operation panel display check
When the PRINT switch is pressed, the LED on the operation panel is lighted for 5 sec. The LED on the FAX
panel and the LCD balck background are displayed simultaneously.
02 Fusing lamp ON + cooling fan HIGH/LOW speed
When the START key is pressed, the fusing lamp repeats ON (500ms) and OFF (500msec) 5 times.
During this period, the cooling fan rotates in the high speed mode. After completion of the operation, the cooling
fan rotates in the low speed mode.
03 Copy lamp ON
When the START key is pressed, the copy lamp is lighted for 5 sec.
06 01 Paper feed solenoid ON
When the START key is pressed, the paper feed solenoid selected by the tray select key repeats ON (500ms)
and OFF (500ms) 20 times.
02 Resist solenoid ON
When the START key is pressed, the resist solenoid (RRS) repeats ON (500ms) and OFF (500ms) 20 times.
9 – 2
AR-F151

07 01 Warm-up display and aging with jam
1. When the simulation is executed, warming up is started.
2. Warm-up time is counted and displayed every second on the copy quantity display.
3. After completion of warm-up, the time count is stopped and the ready lamp is lighted.
4. Press the clear key to clear the warm-up time display, set the copy quantity, and press the START key, and
the machine will copy the set quantity repeatedly.
06 Intermittent aging
1. When the simulation is executed, warming up is started.
2. After completion of warm-up, the ready lamp is lighted.
3. Set the copy quantity and press the START key, and the machine will copy the set quantity repeatedly.
4. After 3 sec of the interval time from completion of copying the set quantity, the machine will resume copying.
5. The above operation 4 is repeated.
08 01 Developing bias
When the START key is pressed, the developing bias is outputted for 30 sec.
02 Main charger (Grid high)
When the START key is pressed, the main charger output is supplied for 30 sec in the grid voltage HIGH mode.
03 Grid voltage (Low)
When the START key is pressed, the main charger output is supplied for 30 sec in the grid voltage LOW mode.
06 Transfer charger
When the START key is pressed, the transfer charger output is supplied for 30 sec.
10 None Toner motor aging
When the START key is pressed, the toner motor output is supplied for 30 sec.
14 None Cancel of troubles other than U2
After canceling the trouble, the simulation is also automatically canceled.
16 None Cancel of U2 trouble
1. When the START key is pressed, the EEPROM total counter check sum is rewritten and the trouble is
canceled.
2. After canceling the trouble, the simulation is also automatically canceled.
20 01 Maintenance counter clear
When the PRINT switch is pressed, the maintenance counter value is cleared and the value of 000000 is
displayed.
21 01 Maintenance cycle setup
The currently set maintenance cycle code is displayed (initial display), and the set data is stored.
Code Setup
0 3,000 sheets
1 6,000 sheets
2 9,000 sheets
3 13,000 sheets
4 18,000 sheets
5 Free (999,999 sheets) ∗ Default
22 01 Maintenance counter display

The display method is the same as the total count value display.
02 Maintenance preset value display
The value corresponding to the code set with SIM 21-01 is displayed. The display method is the same as the
total count value display.
04 Jam total counter display
05 Total counter display
The total count value is dispalyed in 3 digits × 2 times repeatedly.
<Display example: 12345>
012 → Blank → 345 → Blank → 012
0.7s 0.3s 0.7s 1.0s 0.7s
9 – 3
AR-F151

22 08 SPF counter display
12 Drum counter display
14 P-ROM versiondisplay
The P-ROM version is displayed in 3 digits on the value display section.
(AR, DM, PCL models: 100% Zoom lamp display)
17 Copy counter display
18 Printer counter display
20 Fax print counter display
21 Scanner counter display
22 SPF jam total counter display
23 FAX reception counter display
24 FAX transmission counter display
24 01 Jam total counter clear
When the PRINT switch is pressed, the jam total count value is reset to 0.
04 SPF counter clear
When the PRINT switch is pressed, the SPF count value is reset to 0.
07 Drum counter clear
When the PRINT switch is pressed, the drum count value is reset to 0.
08 Copy counter clear
When the PRINT switch is pressed, the copy count value is reset to 0.
09 Printer counter clear
When the PRINT switch is pressed, the printer count value is reset to 0.
10 FAX transmission/reception counter clear
When the PRINT switch is pressed, the FAX transmission/reception count value is reset to 0.
11 FAX print couter clear
When the PRINT switch is pressed, the Fax print-out count value is reset to 0.
13 Scanner counter clear
When the PRINT switch is pressed, the scanner count value is reset to 0.
14 SPF jam total counter clear
When the PRINT switch is pressed, the SPF jam total count value is reset to 0.
25 01 Main motor system ON + Cooling fan low speed (For the duplex model, the duplex motor is simultaneously
turned on.)
When the START key is pressed, the main motor is rotated for 30 sec.
To save toner consumption, the different operations are executed depending on installation of the developing unit.
⋅ When the developing unit is installed, the developing bias, the main charger, and the grid are also outputted.
⋅ When the developing unit is not installed, only the motor is rotated.
∗ Do not turn on the door open/close switch forcibly to execute this simulation.
10 Polygon motor ON
When the START key is pressed, the polygon motor is operated for 30sec.
26 01 Manual feed setup
1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set bypass code number is displayed.
2. Enter the code number corresponding to the bypass and press the START key, and the setting will be
changed.
Code number Bypass

0 Single bypass
1 Multi bypass
9 – 4
AR-F151

26 02 SPF setup
When this simulation is executed, the currently set SPF code number is displayed. Enter the code number of the
SPF to be set and press the PRINT switch. The setup is changed.
Code No. SPF
0 Without SPF
1 With SPF (Setup is required when installing FAX.)
2 With RSPF
03 Second cassette setup

1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number of the second cassette is displayed.
2. Enter the code number and press the start key. The setting is changed.
Code number Second cassette

0 Without second cassette
1 With second cassette
04 Machine duplex setup

(Operation/procedure)
1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set duplex code number is displayed.
2. Enter the code number corresponding to the duplex and press the ENTER key, and the setup will be changed.
Code number Duplex
0 Without Duplex
1 With Duplex
06 Destination setup
1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set destination code number is displayed.
2. Enter the code number corresponding to the destination and press the START key, and the setting will be
changed.
Code number Destination

0 Inch series
1 EX AB series
2 Japan AB series
07 Machine conditions check

When this simulation is executed, the current machine setting is displayed.
 The machine type is shown with the lamp display. 
CPM Copy quantity display  
10 cpm 10  AL series: None 
 AR-A series: AE mode lamp ON 
12 cpm 12  AR-B series: TEXT mode lamp ON 
 
15 cpm 15
 DM series: Photo mode lamp ON 
20 Rear edge void setup
1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number of rear edge void setting is displayed.
2. Enter the code number of rear edge void setting and press the START key, and the setting will be changed.
Code number Rear edge void setting

0 Rear edge void allowed
1 Rear edge void not allowed
30 CE mark conformity control ON/OFF setup

1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number of CE mark application is displayed.
2. Enter the code number of CE mark application and press the START key, and the setting will be changed.
Code number CE mark application setting

0 CE mark application control OFF
1 CE mark application control ON
9 – 5
AR-F151

26 38 Cancel of stop at drum life over
1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed.
2. Enter the code number and press the START key, and the setting will be changed.
Code number Setting

0 Stop at drum life over
1 Stop cancel at drum life over
39 Memory capacity setup

Code number Setting

0 No memory
1 4 Mbyte
2 6 Mbyte
40 Polygon motor OFF time setup

Code number Setting
0 0 sec
1 30 sec
2 60 sec
3 90 sec
42 Transfer ON timing control setup

(Operation / Procedure)
2. Enter the code number and press the START key, and the setting will be changed. (For any number different
from the following ones, the default time is automatically set.)
Code number Setting

0 Default (330 msec)
1 –40 msec
2 –30 msec
3 –20 msec
4 –10 msec
5 Default (330 msec)
6 +10 msec
7 +20 msec
8 +30 msec
9 +40 msec
9 – 6
AR-F151

26 43 Side void setup
1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number of the side void amount is displayed.
2. Enter the code number and press the start key. The setting is changed.
Code number Setting

0 0 mm
1 0.5 mm
2 1.0 mm
3 1.5 mm
4 2.0 mm *Default
5 2.5 mm
6 3.0 mm
7 3.5 mm
8 4.0 mm
9 4.5 mm
10 5.0 mm
44 SPF document rear edge read setup + Fax document rear edge scan setup.
When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed. Enter the desired code number
and press the START key, and the display will be changed. The document rear edge scanning area in SPF
reduction (less than 100%) copy is changed.
The code number is changeable in the range of 0 – 8.

The default value is 4, and 2 mm of the document rear edge is cut.
When the value is changed by 1, the area is changed by 1 mm.
47 FAX document rear edge scan setup
When this simulation is executed, the currently set code number is displayed. Enter the desired code number
and press the print switch, and the setup is switched. The scan area at the rear edge of FAX original with SPF
is changed according to the entered code number.
Code number is in the range of 0 – 8.
The default is 4. When set to the default, the area of about 2 mm from the rear edge of the original is cut out.
When the value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed by about 1 mm.
30 01 Paper sensor status display
The paper sensor status is displayed with the lamps on the operation panel.
Display Sensor
Developer cartridge replacement lamp Paper detection before resist (PPD1)
JAM lamp Fusing section paper detection (PPD2)
Photoconductor cartridge replacement lamp Paper exit paper detection (POD)
2nd cassette lamp 2nd CS paper detection (PPD3)
Zoom lamp New drum cartridge detection (PUIS)
AE lamp Single manual feed paper detection (MFD)
Exposure level 1 (Light) lamp Main cassette A4 width detection (PSW1)
Exposure level 5 (Dark) lamp 2nd cassette A4 width detection (PSW2)
43 01 Fusing temperature setup (Normal copy)

Code number Set temperature (˚C)
0 175
1 180
2 185
3 190
4 195 (∗ Default)
5 200
9 – 7
AR-F151

43 04 Fusing temperature setup 2
Code number Set temperature (˚C)
0 155
1 160
2 165
3 170 (∗ Default)
4 175
5 180
05 Duplex mode fusing temperature setup

2. Enter the code number corresponding to the duplex and press the START key. The setting is changed
accordingly.
Code number Shift temperature (˚C)

0 ±0˚C
1 –8˚C
2 –6˚C
3 –4˚C
4 –2˚C
5 ±0˚C
6 +2˚C
7 +4˚C
8 +6˚C
9 +8˚C
∗ The above shift temperature set by this simulation is added to the fusing temperature of single copy.
09 Postcard size paper fusing control setup
Code number Setup

0 Cancel (Default)
1 Setup
46 01 Copy density adjustment

(Outline)
Used to adjust the copy density in each copy mode.(The copy density can be set by changing the set value of
ASIC GAMMA ADJUST register.)
Setting in each copy mode is performed at exposure level 3. When the copy density (exposure) is adjusted
arbitrarily, the max, and min. exposure levels are automatically calculated and set. (The change amounts
(gradient, change amount) at level 1 – 5 are predetermined.)
1. When this simulation is executed, warming up and shading are performed and the current set value is
displayed in two digits.
2. Press the copy mode select key to select each setting mode and setting display.
∗ The copy mode setting is indicated with the following lamps as shown below.
3. Change the setting with the value up-down key and press the START key, and a copy will be made with the
entered set value.
4. Press the clear key to store the set value and exit the simulation.
Copy mode Display lamp

AE mode AE mode lamp
TEXT mode TEXT mode lamp
PHOTO mode PHOTO mode lamp
TS mode (TEXT) TEXT mode lamp & PHOTO mode lamp
TS mode (AE) AE mode lamp & PHOTO mode lamp
9 – 8
AR-F151

46 01 Relationship between the displayed values and the GAMMA ADJUST register
Exp1 Exp2 Exp3 Exp4 Exp5
AE –24 –12 0 +12 +24
TEXT –24 –12 0 +12 +24
PHOTO –24 –12 0 +12 +24
T/S –24 –12 0 +12 +24
The value displayed after execution of this simulation can be set in the range of 0 – 99 with 50 as the center
value.
When the text mode set value is Gat3, for example, the GAMMA ADJUST register value set at Exp1 is:
Text Exp1 = Gat3 – 50 – 24
When 40 is set to Gat3, Text Exp1 = 40 – 50 – 24 = –34
Then set the GAMMA ADJUST register set value to –34.
Perform the same procedure for each mode and each Exp.
∗ The above table may subject to change.
∗ For the gradient, there is a similar table, though not specified here. The value set with SIM 46, however, is
not reflected.
∗ The AE mode Exp selection is not specified, but corresponds to the grades for AE exposure selection in the
former models.
12 FAX density overall adjustment
Used to set the normal mode density setup value added with each FAX resolution mode correction value to
each FAX resolution mode collectively.
(Operating procedure)
When this simulation is executed, warming up and shading are performed and the currently set value is
displayed in 2 digits. (Center value: 50)
Change the set value with the value up-down key and press the PRINT switch. The entered value is stored and
the simulation is terminated.
During this mode, the resolution mode cannot be selected.
The range of values dispalyed after execution of this simulation is 0 - 99 with 50 as the center.
∗ when reading FAX, the AE denisty can be selected in three levels (Dark, Normal, Light). However, in this
mode, copying is made in Normal. (There is no manual setup in reading FAX.)
13 FAX density adjustment (Normal mode)
Used to set the denisty set value in the normal mode individually.
Same as the FAX density overall adjustment.
14 FAX denisty adjustment (Small character mode)
Used to set the denisty set value in the small character mode individually.
Since, however, the small character mode has the Text document mode and the Photo document mode,
changeover can be made with the copy mode select key and the set value of the selected mode is displayed on
the copy quantity display. The copy mode setup is made as shown below.
Mode Display lamp

Text document mode AE mode lamp
Photo document mode Photo mode lamp
15 FAX density adjustment (Fine mode)

Used to set the denisty set value in the fine mode individually.
16 FAX density adjustment (Fine (300dpi) mode)
Used to set the denisty set value in the fine (300dpi) mode individually.
9 – 9
AR-F151

48 01 Front/rear scan direction
(Outline)
(1) Front/rear scanning direction magnification ratio auto correction: (Performed by changing the set value of
ZOOM DATA register for asic.) The width of the reference line marked on the shading correction plate is
scanned to perform the front/rear direction magnification ratio adjustment automatically. (Performed by
changing the set value of ZOOM DATA register for ASIC.)
(2) Front/rear scanning direction magnification ratio manual correction: Used to set the front/rear (main scanning)
direction magnification ratio by key operations. (Performed by changing the set value of ZOOM DATA
register for ASIC.)
(3) Scanning direction magnification ratio correction: The scanning direction magnification ratio in the OC mode is
set by key operations. (Performed by changing the scanning speed.)
(4) SPF mode scanning direction magnification ratio correction: The scanning direction magnification ratio in the
OC mode is set by key operations. (Performed by changing the scanning speed.)
1. When this simulation is executed, the current set value is displayed in two digits. (Center value: 50)
2. When the copy mode select key is pressed, the setting mode and the setting display are changed
sequentially.
∗ The selected adjustment mode is indicated by the lamps as follows:
3. In the front/rear scanning direction adjustment, when the START key is pressed, the mirror base unit moves
to the white plate for shading and the width of the reference line is read and the correction value is
calculated and displayed and the value is stored.
In the case of the manual adjustment, enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the START key.
Then the entered value is stored and a copy is made. (An increase of 1 in the set value corresponds to an
increase of 1&.)
Adjustment mode Lamps ON

Front/rear direction magnification ratio auto correction AE lamp
Front/rear direction magnification ratio manual correction TEXT lamp
Scanning direction magnification ratio correction PHOTO lamp
SPF mode scanning direction magnification ratio correction AE, TEXT, PHOTO lamps
In the front-rear direction magnification ratio correction:

(1) The result of calculation of the scan correction value is ±5% or less, “- -” is displayed.
(Cause) The white plate reference position error or the lens unit installing error
(2) In case of a scanning error of the reference line, the JAM lamp is turned on.
(Cause) CCD error or no white plate
∗) If the automatic correction of magnification ratio does not work properly, adjust and correct manually.
50 01 Lead edge image position adjustment + Paper lead edge/rear edge void adjustment
(Outline)
This adjustment is used to adjust the copy image position and lead edge/rear edge void amount on the copy
paper by adjusting the image scan start position and the print start position (resist roller ON timing) at 100%.
1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed in two digits. (Center value: 50)
2. When the copy mode select key is pressed, each setting mode and the display are changed.
∗ The selected adjustment mode is indicated by the lamps as shown in the table below.
3. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the start key. The set value is stored and a copy is
made. (When the set value is increased by 1, the void amount is shifted by 0.1 mm.)
4. When the clear key is pressed, the set value is stored and the simulation mode is terminated.
Adjustment mode Lighting lamps
Print start position (Main cassette) AE, Main cassette lamps
Print start position (2nd cassette) AE, 2nd lamps
Print start position (Manual paper feed) AE, Manual feed lamps
Image lead edge void quantity TEXT lamp
Image scan start position PHOTO lamp
Image rear edge void quantity AE, TEXT, PHOTO lamps
SPF image scan start position AE, TEXT lamps
9 – 10
AR-F151

50 1 (Adjustment method)
1. Set the print start position (A: AE ON), the lead edge void amount (B: TEXT ON), the scanning start position
(C: PHOTO ON) to zero and make a copy of a scale at 100%.
2. Measure the image loss R (mm) of the scale.
Set as C = 10 × R (mm). (Example: Set to 30.) (Example) Distance from the paper
∗ When C is increased by 10, the image loss is decreased lead edge to the image
H = 5mm
by 1 mm. (Default: 5)
3. Measure the distance H (mm) from the paper lead edge to Image loss
the image print start position. R = 3mm
Set as A = 10 × R (mm). (Example: Set to 50.)
∗ When the value of A is increased by 10, the image lead
edge is shifted toward the paper lead edge by 1 mm.
(Default: 50)
4. Set the lead edge void amount as B = 50 (2.5 mm).
(Default: 50)
∗ When the value of B is increased by 10, the void is
increased by about 1 mm.
(For 25 or less, however, the void amount becomes zero.)
✩ The SPF adjustment is made by adjusting the SPF image scan start position immediately after turning on the
power.
10 Paper center offset + OC/Document center offset + SPF document center offset
(Outline)
The center offset position of copy image on the copy paper and that of document scan are adjusted by
adjusting the scan left margin of ASIC and the print left margin register set value.
1. When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed.
2. For a machine with a multi manual paper feed unit installed, when the copy mode select key is pressed, each
set mode and display are changed.
For a machine with a single manual paper feed unit installed, when the copy mode select key is pressed,
each set mode and display are changed.
✩ Machine with a multi manual paper feed unit
Adjustment mode Display lamp

Print center offset (Main cassette paper feed) AE, main cassette lamp
Print center offset (2nd cassette paper feed) AE, 2nd cassette lamp
Print center offset (Manual paper feed) AE, Manual paper feed lamp
OC/Document center offset AE, TEXT lamp
SPF/Document center offset AE, TEXT, PHOTO lamp
✩ Machine with a single manual paper feed unit

Print center offset (Main cassette paper feed) AE, Main cassette lamp
Print center offset (Manual paper feed) AE lamp (Blinking)
OC/Document center offset AE, TEXT lamp
SPF/Document center offset AE, TEXT, PHOTO lamp
9 – 11
AR-F151

50 18 Memory reverse position adjustment in duplex copy
When this simulation is executed, the currently set correction value is displayed. Enter the desired correction
value with the 10-key and press the print key. The entered value is stored. (The correction value ranges from 1
to 99. 0 or 50 for zero correction.)
Front print in the S-D mode and even page print in the D-S mode are performed with reverse memory operation
from the rear of the original. When, therefore, the print position adjustment of the output image is required,
perform the adjustment as follows:
The image direction in reverse memory copy is shown in Fig. 1. When the original scanning is made in the
arrow direction, output images are printed from the rear edge of scanning.
If, therefore, the print lead edge is shifted, set the reference chart so that the reference position is in the rear
and use this simulation to change the simulation set value so that the lead edge of print images comes in the
proper position.
Printing is started at the print start position and executed from the final memory image data to the head data.
By changing the position of the end data stored in memory with the simulation set value, the image lead edge
position is adjusted and the read edge position of scanning is changed.
Therefore, the end position of scanning is changed by the simulation set value to change the position of the end
data stored in memory. The image lead edge is adjusted in this manner.
Original transport direction Paper transport direction

Lead edge of scanning Print lead edge
Lead edge void (1)
Print start position
End position of scanning

(Default: Scan cut by void(1))
Rear edge void
Print rear edge
Rear edge of scanning
Scanning direction
19 Duplex copy rear edge void adjustment

Used to adjust the rear edge void in duplex copy.
When this simulation is executed, the currently set value is displayed in 2 digits.
When the copy mode select key is pressed, the set mode and the display are switched sequentially.
Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the print key, and the entered value is stored and a copy
is made. When the clear key is pressed, the entered value is stored and the simulation mode is terminated.
(When the set value is increased by 1, the void is increased by about 0.1mm.)
Adjustment mode Lamp ON

Image cut rear edge void (RSPF) AE lamp
Paper rear edge void TEXT lamp
9 – 12
AR-F151

51 02 Resist quantity adjustment
Used to adjust the contact pressure of paper onto the copier resist roller and the RSPF resist roller.
2. In a machine with the multi paper feed unit installed, press the copy mode select key, and each setting mode
and display are changed sequentially.
In a machine with the single paper feed unit installed, press the copy mode select key, and each setting
mode and display are changed sequentially.
∗ The selected adjustment mode is indicated by the lamps as follows:
3. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the SORT key. Then the set value is stored and a copy
is made.
∗ Machine with the multi manual paper feed
Main cassette paper feed AE, Main cassette lamp
2nd cassette paper feed AE, 2nd cassette lamp
Manual paper feed AE, Manual paper feed lamp
RSPF document feed (front) AE, TEXT, PHOTO lamp
RSPF document feed (back) AE, TEXT lamp
Duplex back TEXT, PHOTO lamp
∗ Machine with the single manual paper feed

Main cassette paper feed AE, Main cassette lamp
Manual paper feed AE blinking (Main cassette lamp ON)
RSPF document feed (front) AE, TEXT, PHOTO lamp
RSPF document feed (back) AE, TEXT lamp
Duplex back TEXT, PHOTO lamp
06 SPF exposure correction

(Outline)
The APF exposure correction amount is adjusted by adjusting the change in Vref voltage for the OC mode.
2. Enter the adjustment value with the 10-key and press the start key. The entered value is stored and a copy is
made.
∗ When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the D/A output is changed by +1 digit (dark) for OC
exposure. When it is changed by –1, the output is changed by –1 digit (light).
3. When the clear key is pressed, the entered value is stored and the simulation mode is terminated.
61 03 Polygon motor check (HSYNC output check)
When the START key is pressed, HSYNC is performed and the polygon motor is rotated for 30 sec.
At that time, the Zoom lamp is lighted for 100msec e3very time when HSYNC is detected.
63 01 Shading check
(Outline)
Used to display the detection level of the white plate for shading. (Vref of AD conversion IC is fixed.)
When the START key is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the white plate for shading and Vref+ voltage of
AD conversion IC is set to 4.5V and Vref- voltage to 0.5V, and the copy lamp is lighted.
This state is kept for 10 sec, and the level of one pixel at the center is detected every second to display on the
value display section.
64 1 Self print only with the engine (1 by 2 mode)
(Outline)
Used to print in the 1 by 2 mode by ignoring the state of the optical system.
1. When this simulation is executed, warming up is made and the ready lamp is lighted.
2. Select with the cassette select key and press the start key. Paper is fed from the selected cassette and
printing is performed.
In the 1 by 2 mode, one line is printed and two lines are not printed.
66 None Simulation on the FAX panel (For details, refer to the FAX simulation.)
9 – 13
AR-F151
3. FAX simulations (AR-F151 only)

A. Entering the FAX simulation mode
There are following two ways of entering the Fax simulation mode. They differ only in the key sequence and the operations of the simulation are
the same in either mode.
For key operations in the FAX simulation mode, use the LCD display and the FAX panel.
During Fax operations, the Fax simulation cannot be entered.
(1) From the FAX panel
Procedure Procedure Position Operation
1 Press FUNCTION, 9, ∗, 8, #, 7. Fax Panel ROM version is displayed on the LCD.
2 Press ENTER. Fax Panel FAX enters the simulation mode.
The machine is in the normal display.
3 Press ← / → proper times. Fax Panel Each mode name is displayed on the LCD sequentially.
4 Press ENTER. Fax Panel The mode is determined.
5 Procedure in each mode Fax Panel Operations in each mode
Instead of above procedures 3 and 4, press the code (2 digits) of the target mode to enter the mode directly.
(2) From the COPIER panel
Procedure Procedure Position Operation
1 Press Clear, Exposure, Clear, Copier Panel Waiting for simulation code.
Exposure. FAX is in the normal display.
2 Enter the main code of 66 with Copier Panel “66” is displayed on 7SEG LED.
10Up/1Up keys.
3 Press START key. Copier Panel The machine exits the simulation mode, and the FAX enters the
simulation mode.
4 Press ← / → proper times. Fax Panel Each mode name is displayed on the LCD sequentially.
5 Press ENTER. Fax Panel The mode is determined.
6 Procedure in each mode Fax Panel Operations in each mode
Instead of above procedures 4 and 5, press the code number (2 digits) of the target mode to enter the mode directly.
B. List of functions
Mode LCD display
Mode Details of functions
# (Mode name)
01 Soft switch setting This mode is used to change the soft switch setup. The available soft switches 01:SOFT SWITCH
mode are SW1 to SW30. The contents of soft switches are backed up.
For details of soft switches, refer to “Software Switch for FAX.”
02 Soft switch clear This mode is used to reset the soft switch setup (including the user option setup) 02:SOFT SW CLEAR
mode (Only the to the default.
setup is cleared.) Since, however, some of soft switches have the adjustment values, the area for
the adjustment values is excluded from the targets.
03 ROM & RAM This mode is used to perform ROM check sum and RAM read/write test. 03:ROM/RAM CHECK
check mode The result is shown with the buzzer and the LCD.
No error: NO ERROR/ No buzzer
ROM error : ROM ERROR / Buzzer once
RAM error : RAM ERROR / Buzzer twice
9 – 14
AR-F151
04 Signal send mode This mode is used to send various signals to the line. The FAX signal is sent in 04:SIGNAL SEND
the level set with the soft switch.
There are the following kinds of signals:
1 No signal ( OFF HOOK state)

2 DTMF (0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,*,#)
3 14400 bps (V.17) (00000000b, 11111111b, 01010101b)
4 12000 bps (V.17) (00000000b, 11111111b, 01010101b)
5 9600 bps (V.17) (00000000b, 11111111b, 01010101b)
6 7200 bps (V.17) (00000000b, 11111111b, 01010101b)
7 9600 bps (V.29) (00000000b, 11111111b, 01010101b)
8 7200 bps (V.29) (00000000b, 11111111b, 01010101b)
9 4800 bps (V27ter) (00000000b, 11111111b, 01010101b)
10 2400 bps (V27ter) (00000000b, 11111111b, 01010101b)
11 300 bps (FLAG) (00000000b, 11111111b, 01010101b)
12 2100 Hz (CED)
13 1100 Hz (CNG)
10 Image memory This mode is used to clear the image data memory (DRAM). 10:IMAGE MEM CLEAR
clear mode (Only
the image data is
cleared.)
14 Dial test / This mode is used to dial in dial pulse (10PPS) and to set the pulse make ratio 14:DIAL TEST 10 PPS
adjustment mode adjustment value.
(Pulse 10 pps) The range of make ratio variable range: -8% ∼ +7%
The setup is reflected on the adjustment value area of the soft switch.
The dialed number is fixed to “1590.”
16 Dial test mode This mode is used to dial with DTMF. 16:DIAL TEST TONE
(Tone) The number to be dialed is fixed to “123456789∗0#”.
21 Print out soft This mode is used to print the report on the current soft switch setup. 21:PRINT SOFT SW
switch mode
42 FAX Panel check This mode is used to check the keys and the LED on the FAX panel. 42:FAX PANEL TEST
mode When any key on the FAX panel other than the STOP key is pressed, the name
of the pressed key is displayed on the LCD.
The LED’s on the FAX panel are lighted one by one sequentially.
When any change is made on a sensor in the SPF section, the sensor name as
well as its ON/OFF status is displayed on the LCD.
43 Signal detect mode This mode is used to detect signals in the line, and the detected signal name is 43:SIG. DETECT
displayed on the LCD. The signals to be detected are CNG, DTMF, and silent.
The detection conditions conform to the soft switch setup.
44 Long distance This mode is used to specify the other party FAX numbers registered in the one- 44:LONG DIST COMM
comm. Select mode touch/speed dial, with which communication errors occur frequently due to poor
line conditions
To the specified parties, the max. transmission speed is compulsorily reduced to
stabilize the communication line.
The speed is available in 9600BPS and 4800BPS.
C. Operating procedures in each mode

(1) Soft SW change method
Procedure LCD Operation
1 Press FUNCTION, 9, ∗, 8, #, 7. DIAGNOSTIC MODE
ROM VERSION = <version>
2 Press ENTER. DIAGNOSTIC MODE
SELECT MENU(← →)
3 Press 0, 1. SW # =
4 Enter the SW No. (2 digits) to be changed. SW # = 10
5 Press ← / → to shift the cursor to the bit to be SW10 = 00010101
changed. (The left edge is Bit No. 1.) bit # = 12345678
6 Press FUNCTION to highlight the bit in the cursor SW10 = 10010101
position. bit # = 12345678
7 Press ENTER to register. SW # = Return to Step 3.
Press STOP to exit from the mode.
9 – 15
AR-F151
(2) Soft switch clear mode

3 Press 0, 2. 02:SOFT SW CLEAR
1:OK 2:CANCEL
4 Press 1. DIAGNOSTIC MODE The soft switches setup is reset to the default,
SELECT MENU(← →) and this mode is terminated.
(3) ROM & RAM check mode

3 Press 0, 3. 03:ROM/RAM CHECK
4 (Normal case) ROM/RAM OK
(RAM error) RAM ERROR Two short beeps
(ROM error) ROM ERROR One short beep
(4) Signal send mode

3 Press 0, 4. 04:SIGNAL SEND
SELECT SIGNAL
4 Press ← or → repeatedly to select the target <signal type> For <signal type>, refer to TABLE-3.
signal. PRESS ENTER KEY
5 When the target signal is displayed, press ENTER. mode # = 1 → 10
mode # = 2 → 20
mode # = 3 ∼ 6 → 30
mode # = 7 → 40
10 1:NO SIGNAL The relay is turned ON.
11 Press STOP. 04:SIGNAL SEND The relay is turned OFF.
SELECT SIGNAL “NO SIGNAL” mode is terminated.
12 (To terminate this mode) This mode is terminated.
Press STOP.
20 2:DTMF
DTMF # =
21 Press any NUM key(0 ∼ 9) or ∗ or #. 2:DTMF The DTMF signal corresponding to the
DTMF # = <pressed key> pressed key is sent.
22 Press STOP. 2:DTMF
DTMF # =
23 (To continue)
Go to 21.
(To change the signal kind) 04:SIGNAL SEND
Press STOP. SELECT SIGNAL
(To terminate this mode) This mode is terminated.
Press STOP twice.
30 <signal type>
SELECT SPEED
31 Press ← or → to select the target speed. <signal speed> For <signal speed>, refer to TABLE-4.
PRESS ENTER KEY
9 – 16
AR-F151

32 When the target speed is displayed, press ENTER. <signal speed>
SELECT DATA
33 Press ← or → to select the target data to be sent. <data> For <data>, refer to TABLE-5.
PRESS ENTER KEY
34 When the target data is displayed, press ENTER. <signal speed> The selected signal is sent.
<data>
35 Press STOP. <signal speed> Signal send stop
SELECT DATA
36 (To change data only)
Go to 33.
(To change speed) <signal type>
Press STOP. SELECT SPEED
Press STOP twice. SELECT SIGNAL
Press STOP 3 times.
40 7:TONE
SELECT FREQUENCY
41 Press ← or → to select the target frequency. <signal freq.> For <signal freq.>, refer to TABLE-4.
PRESS ENTER KEY
42 When the target frequency is displayed, press <signal freq.> The selected signal is sent.
ENTER.
43 Press STOP. 7:TONE Signal send stop
SELECT FREQUENCY
44 (To change the frequency only)
Go to 41.
Press STOP. SELECT SIGNAL
Press STOP twice.
TABLE-3: Signals in the Signal send mode

MODE # MENU DISPLAY
1 No signal 1:NO SIGNAL
2 DTMF 2:DTMF
3 V.17 3:V.17
4 V.29 4:V.29
5 V27ter 5:V27ter
6 FLAG 6:FLAG
7 Tone (CED/CNG) 7:TONE
TABLE-4: Speed/Frequency in the Signal send mode

MODE # MENU ITEM 1 MENU ITEM 2 MENU ITEM 3 MENU ITEM 4
3 1:V.17 14400BPS 2:V.17 12000BPS 3:V.17 9600BPS 4:V.17 7200BPS
4 1:V.29 9600BPS 2:V.29 7200BPS
5 1:V27ter 4800BPS 2:V27ter 2400BPS
6 1:FLAG 300BPS
7 1:TONE 2100Hz 2:TONE 1100Hz
TABLE-5: Data which is sent in the Signal send mode

MODE # MENU (DATA) DISPLAY
1 00000000b 1:00000000b
2 11111111b 2:11111111b
3 01010101b 3:01010101b
9 – 17
AR-F151
(5) Image memory clear mode

ROM VERSION =
<version>
3 Press 1, 0. 10:IMAGE MEM CLEAR
1:OK 2:CANCEL
4 Press 1. DIAGNOSTIC MODE The image data are cleared and this mode is
SELECT MENU(← →) terminated.
(6) Dial test / adjustment mode (Pulse 10PPS)

ROM VERSION =
<version>
3 Press 1, 4. 14:DIAL TEST 10 PPS The current make ratio setup is displayed on ##.
MAKE RATIO = ##%
4 Press ← or →. 14:DIAL TEST 10 PPS Press ← to decrease by 1%.
(If there is no need to adjust, no need to press.) MAKE RATIO = ##% Press → to increase by 1%.
5 Press ENTER. “1590” is dialed.
6 (Adjustment/test end) This mode is terminated.
Press STOP.
(To continue adjustment/test)
Return to 4.
(7) Dial test mode (Tone)

ROM VERSION =
<version>
3 Press 1, 6. 16:DIAL TEST TONE “123456789∗0#” is dialed.
This mode is terminated.
(8) Print out soft switch mode

ROM VERSION =
<version>
3 Press 2, 1. 21:PRINT SOFT SW The soft switch list is printed.
This mode is terminated.
9 – 18
AR-F151
(9) Panel check mode

ROM VERSION =
<version>
3 Press 4, 2. 42:FAX PANEL TEST
4 Press any key. 42:FAX PANEL TEST The name of the pressed key is displayed in the
<key name> lower stage of the LCD.
5 Press STOP. This mode is terminated.
(10) Signal detect mode

ROM VERSION =
<version>
3 Press 4, 3. 43:SIG. DETECT
4 (When DTMF signal is detected) 43:SIG. DETECT
DTMF:<number>
(When CNG signal is detected) 43:SIG. DETECT
CNG
(When QUIET signal is detected) 43:SIG. DETECT
QUIET
Press STOP.
(11) Long distance comm select mode

ROM VERSION =
<version>
3 Press 4, 4. 44:LONG DIST COMM To terminate this mode, press STOP.
1:SET 2:CLEAR
4 Select the mode. To register → 10
To cancel registration → 20
10 Press 1. SET
ENTER # OR RAPID
11 Press the desired one touch key or the speed SELECT SPEED
dial (2 digits) to be registered. 1:9600BPS 2:4800BPS
12 Select the speed. (Press 1 or 2.) <Name or Number>
STORED
13 Return to 3.
20 Press 2. CLEAR
ENTER # OR RAPID
21 Press the desired one-touch key or speed dial (2 <Name or Number>
digits) to be canceled. CLEARED
22 Return to 3.
Note:
● One-touch keys and speed dials which are not registered cannot be designated.
● When one-touch keys and speed dials which are registered are canceled, this setup is also canceled.
● The group key and the polling key cannot be designated.
9 – 19
AR-F151
4. Software switch for FAX (AR-F151 only)

A. Software Switch List
This machine is provided with the following software switches for the use by a serviceman.
The setup items of SW21 and later correspond to user setup one-to-one.
Since SW17 ∼ 20 are assigned to adjustment values, they are not cleared by Memory Clear.
SW Bit
ITEM Soft SW setting and function Factory Setting
No. No.
1 1 300dpi reception enable Used to set enable/disable of 300 × 300dpi reception. 0
1 : Enable 0 : Disable
2 200 × 400dpi reception enable Used to set enable/disable of 200 × 400dpi reception. 1
3 Max. modem speed in reception Used to limit the max. reception speed of Modem to 1
4 14400bps, 12000bps, 9600bps, 7200bps, 4800bps, 2400bps. 1
5 0
Bit 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400
No. BPS BPS BPS BPS BPS BPS
3 1 1 0 0 0 0
4 1 0 1 1 0 0
5 ∗ ∗ 1 0 1 0
6 Max. modem speed in sending Used to limit the max. sending speed of Modem to 1
7 14400bps, 12000bps, 9600bps, 7200bps, 4800bps, 2400bps. 1
8 0
Bit 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400
No. BPS BPS BPS BPS BPS BPS
6 1 1 0 0 0 0
7 1 0 1 1 0 0
8 ∗ ∗ 1 0 1 0
2 1 Silent detection threshold value Used to set the threshold value of silent detection in the 1
2 answering and recording mode. 0
3 0
4 Threshold = 8 × Bit1 + 4 × Bit2 + 2 × Bit3 + 1 × Bit4 0
Factory setting = 8
5 Silent detection start time Used to set the silent detection start time in the answering 0
6 and recording mode. The time set with this switch is that 1
7 from connection of the line to silent detection start. 0
8 1
TIME = 8 × Bit5 + 4 × Bit6 + 2 × Bit7 + 1 × Bit8 sec
Factory setting = 8 × 0 + 4 × 1 + 2 × 0 + 1 × 1 = 5 sec
3 1 CNG detection threshold value Used to set the threshold value of CNG signal detection. 0
2 (AUTO, MANUAL mode) 1
4 Factory setting = 7 1
5 CNG detection threshold value Used to set the required number of times of CNG detection 0
6 (A. M. mode) for recognition of CNG signal one time. 0
7 1
Factory setting = 3
9 – 20
AR-F151
SW Bit
No. No.
4 1 Silent detection end time Used to set the silent detection end time in the answering 0
2 and recording mode. The time set with this switch is that 1
from the last call sound to the silent detection end.
Bit No. No limit 60sec 45sec 30sec
1 1 1 0 0
2 1 0 1 0
3 Number of times of CNG detection 1

4 0
Number of times = 2 × Bit5 + 1 × Bit6 + 1
Factory setting = 2 × 1 + 1 × 0 + 1 = 3 times
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
8 Answering and recording mode Used to select the CNG signal detection filter in the 0
signal detection filter answering and recording mode.
1 : Type 2 0 : Type 1
5 1 Max. reception length Used to set or not to set the max. reception length of FAX 0
documents. When this function is enabled, a reception length
of 1.5m or above is treated as a communication error.
1 : No limit 0 : 1.5 m
2 Reserved 0
3 Reserved 0
4 Line monitor When this function is enabled, the sound of the line under 0
5 FAX session can be heard. 0
Bit No. Always ON Error Only OFF

4 1 0 0
5 ∗ 1 0
6 Protocol monitor (LCD) When this function is enabled, the signal name under FAX 0
session is displayed on the LCD in real time.
1 : ON 0 : OFF
7 Protocol monitor (Report) When this function is enabled, the detailed report on 0
8 communication is provided after completion of FAX sending 0
or reception.
Bit No. Always ON Error Only OFF

7 1 0 0
8 ∗ 1 0
6 1 Signal send level This mode is used to set the FAX signal send level. 1
2 The effective set range is –1 dBm to –16 dBm. 0
3 The values are mere estimation figures because they are 0
4 affected by DAA. 0
LEVEL = –8 × Bit1 –4 × Bit2 –2 × Bit3 –0 × Bit4 –1 dBm

Factory setting = –9 dBm (Set for each destination)
(When modem speed ≥ 7200 bps :
If setting is –1 or –2 dBm , the level is forced to –3 dBm.)
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Dial tone detection Used to set ON/OFF of dial tone detection before dialing for 1
FAX sending.
When this function is set to ON, dialing is started after
detection of the dial tone.
When this function is set to OFF, dialing is started after the
set time of “Interval between OFF-HOOK and dial send”
regardless of dial tone detection.
1 : ON 0 : OFF
9 – 21
AR-F151
SW Bit
No. No.
6 8 Busy tone detection Used to set ON/OFF of busy tone detection. When this 1
function is set to ON, if busy tone is detected, transmission
is interrupted and the machine enters the recall mode.
1 : ON 0 : OFF
7 1 Reception sensitivity offset Used to set the FAX signal reception level offset. The set 0
2 range is –8dBm to +7dBm. 0
3 The values are mere estimation figures because they are 0
4 affected by DAA. 0
When “Auto reception sensitivity adjustment” is set to Enable,
this setup is disabled.
Sensitivity offset =
–8 × Bit1 + 4 × Bit2 + 2 × Bit3 + Bit4 dBm
Factory setting = 0 dBm
5 Auto reception sensitivity When this function is set to Enable, the Modem automatically 1
adjustment adjusts the received signal gain.
6 Transmission Used to select the frequency characteristics in the signal 0

7 Line Equalizer send level. 1
This function is provided to absorb the difference in
frequency characteristics between lines.
When communication errors occur frequently, another
equalizer must be selected.
Gain (dB) for 2000Hz
Equalizer Equalizer Equalizer
Frequency None
1 2 3
500 0 +1.2 –1.0 –1.5
1000 0 –0.4 –1.1 –4.1
1500 0 –0.4 –0.6 –3.6
2500 0 +0.7 +0.9 +2.4
3000 0 +2.5 +2.5 +4.9
Bit No. None Equalizer 1 Equalizer 2 Equalizer 3

6 0 0 1 1
7 0 1 0 1
8 Reserved 0
8 1 Non-modulation carrier send in V.29 Non-modulation carriers are not required for V.29 Modem 0
transmission in ITU-TS standards. However, non-modulation
carriers can be sent in advance to image signals.
This function is effective to avoid communication troubles
due to echoes in oversea communication.
1 : ON 0 : OFF
2 CED tone signal interval Used to set the time interval between the CED signal and 0
the NSF signal.
1 : 500 msec 0 : 75 msec
3 Communication error process Used to set the communication error process for received 1
when receiving RTN RTN when there is an error in transmitted image data and
RTN is returned.
1 : Not transmission error 0 : Transmission error
4 NSF receive acknowledge Used to select between DIS signal recognition at 2-time 0
reception of DIS signal and DIS signal recognition at DIS
signal reception after NSF signal.
0 : Once for NSF reception,
1 : Twice
Twice for DIS reception
9 – 22
AR-F151
SW Bit
No. No.
8 5 EOL detection timer Used to set the EOL (End of Life) detection time to 25sec or 0
13sec. This function is effective to avoid a communication
error due to long EOL of certain models.
1 : 25 sec 0 : 5 sec
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
8 ECM Used to set ON/OFF of ECM. 1
1 : ON 0 : OFF
9 1 Interval between OFF-HOOK and Used to set the delay from OFF-HOOK when starting dialing 1
2 dial send to actual send start of the dial signal. 1
If the dial tone detection function is enabled, this setup is
ignored.
Bit No. 0.5sec 1sec 2sec 3sec

1 0 0 1 1
2 0 1 0 1
3 Reserved 0
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 0
7 Reserved 0
8 0
10 1 Reserved 0
2 FAST Used to set Enable/Disable of RMS (FAST) function. 0
3 Reserved 1
4 Basic resolution Used to select the basic resolution for scanning and printing. 0
1 : Inch series 0 : Metric series
5 Reserved 0
6 Language Used to select the language displayed on the LCD and the 0
7 report. The correspondence between language N and the 0
8 actual language differs depending on the destination. 0
Language 1 Language 2 Language 3
For North American
French Spanish
America English
Lan- Lan- Lan-

Bit
guage guage guage Reserved
No.
1 2 3
6 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
7 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
8 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
9 – 23
AR-F151
SW Bit
No. No.
11 1 Header Used to set the header attachment to the transmitting 0
document.
1 : Not attached 0 : Attached
2 Header in data transfer Used to set the header attachment to the transferring 0
document.
1 : Not attached 0 : Attached
3 Training (EQM) threshold value Used to select the threshold value to judge Success/Failure 0
of training in reception of training.
1 : Easy to fall back 0 : Normal
4 Reserved 0
5 Non ECM error judgement 0
Bit 5, 6, 7 RTP RTN
6 threshold value 1
7 000 32 64 0
001 16 32
010 12 24
011 8 16
100 6 12
101 4 8
8 Reserved 0
12 1 Activity Report Auto Listing time Used to set the start time of Activity Report. 0
2 Setup is made in the unit of one hour, and setup of minutes 0
3 cannot be made. 0
4 0
5 Print start time = 0
Bit1 × 16 + Bit2 × 8 + Bit3 × 4 + Bit4 × 2 + Bit5 hour 00 min
Set range = 0 ∼ 23
Factory Setting = 00:00
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
8 Reserved 0
13 1 Reserved 0
2 Reserved 0
3 Reserved 0
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
8 Reserved 0
14 1 Reserved 0
2 Reserved 0
3 Reserved 0
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
8 Reserved 0
15 1 Reserved 0
2 Reserved 0
3 Reserved 0
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
8 Reserved 0
9 – 24
AR-F151
SW Bit
No. No.
16 1 RING signal frequency check Used to select the allowable frequency range of RING signal. 1
Used to perform a communication test by using a simple
switchboard in production process.
1 : To be checked 0 : Not to be checked
2 Reserved 0
3 Reserved 0
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
8 Reserved 0
17 1 Pulse dial signal make ratio Used to adjust the make ratio of 10PPS pulse dial signal. 0
2 adjustment The set range is –8% to +7%. 0
3 (10PPS) 0
4 Offset = –8 × Bit1 + 4 × Bit2 + 2 × Bit3 + 1 × Bit4 % 0
Factory setting = 0 %
5 Reserved 0
6 0
7 0
8 0
18 1 Reserved 0
2 Reserved 0
3 Reserved 0
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
8 Reserved 0
19 1 Reserved 0
2 Reserved 0
3 Reserved 0
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
8 Reserved 0
20 1 Reserved 0
2 Reserved 0
3 Reserved 0
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
8 Reserved 0
21 1 Record paper size Used to set the reception document size and the report 1
2 output paper size. When set to Auto, the paper size is 1
automatically selected according to the data size and the
reduction ration in reception.
Bit No. Letter Legal A4 AUTO

1 0 0 1 1
2 0 1 0 1
9 – 25
AR-F151
SW Bit
No. No.
21 3 Picture quality priority selection Used to set the default resolution in sending. 0
1 : Fine 0 : Standard
4 Reserved 0
5 Number of reception start calls Used to set the number of calls before reception in the auto 0
6 reception mode. The set range is 0 to 9 times. 0
7 1
8 Number = 8 × Bit5 + 4 × Bit6 + 2 × Bit7 + 1 × Bit8 rings 0
Set range : 0 –9
22 1 Number of auto reception select Used to set the number of calls before reception in the 0
2 manual reception mode. This setup is used as a backup 0
3 function when the external telephone does not respond. The 0
4 set range is OFF and 1 to 9 times. 0
Number = 8 × Bit1 + 4 × Bit2 + 2 × Bit3 + 1 × Bit4 rings

Set range : 0(= OFF), 1 –9
5 Reserved 0
6 Result list print Used to set the printing conditions of the result list after 0
7 completion of communication. 0
8 1
Bit No. Always Err/Tim Send Never Error
6 0 0 0 0 1
7 0 0 1 1 0
8 0 1 0 1 0
23 1 Number of recall times Used to set the number of times of recalls when sending is 0
2 not normally completed due to busy status of the other party 0
3 or a communication error. 1
4 The set range is OFF and 1 to 14 times. For some causes 0
of the communication error, however, the number of times of
recalls must be set to a smaller level.
Recall Times = 8 × Bit1 + 4 × Bit2 + 2 × Bit3 + 1 × Bit4

times
Set range : 0(= OFF), 1 –14
5 Recall interval Used to set the recall interval when a transmission is not 0
6 normally completed due to busy status of the other party or 1
7 a communication error. 0
8 The set range is 1 to 15 minutes. 1
Recall Interval = 8 × Bit5 + 4 × Bit6 + 2 × Bit7 + 1 × Bit8

min
Set range : 1 –15
24 1 Remote select number Used to select the first digit of the select request signal 0
2 when selecting from the external telephone to FAX reception. 1
3 The set range is 0 to 9. 0
4 1
Number = 8 × Bit1 + 4 × Bit2 + 2 × Bit3 + 1 × Bit4
Set range : 0 – 9
5 Remote reception Used to set whether “Remote select number” + “∗∗” from an 1
external telephone is detected and switched to FAX
reception or not.
1 : ON 0 : OFF
6 FAX signal reception Used to set whether CNG signal is detected during OFF- 1
HOOK and switched to FAX reception or not.
1 : ON 0 : OFF
7 Auto cover paper Used to set whether a cover is attached to the last page in 0
every transmission or not.
1 : ON 0 : OFF
8 Reserved 0
9 – 26
AR-F151
SW Bit
No. No.
25 1 Record list auto print Used to set the interval of automatic printing of the record 0
2 list. 0
3 0
Bit No. OFF 1 day 2 days 4 days 1 week
1 0 0 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 1 0
3 0 1 0 1 0
4 Reserved 0
5 Reduction ratio in reception Used to set the magnification ratio of printing received 0
documents. When AUTO is selected, the ratio is
automatically determined according to the received document
size and the output paper.
1 : 100% 0 : AUTO
6 Reserved 0
7 Communication end buzzer time Used to set the time of buzzer sound to notify the end of 0
8 communication. 0
Bit No. 3 Seconds 1 Second No Beep

7 0 0 1
8 0 1 0
26 1 Buzzer sound volume Used to set the sound volumes of all buzzers except for call 0
2 ring. 1
3 0
Bit
MAX HIGH MED LOW MIN OFF
No.
1 0 0 0 0 1 1
2 0 0 1 1 0 0
3 0 1 0 1 0 1
4 Key click sound Used to set whether the click sound is made or not when 1
pressing a key on the FAX panel.
1 : ON 0 : OFF
5 Incoming Ring Volume Used to set the sound volume of call ring. 0
6 1
7 Bit 0
MAX HIGH MED LOW MIN OFF
No.
5 0 0 0 0 1 1
6 0 0 1 1 0 0
7 0 1 0 1 0 1
8 Reserved 0
27 1 Distinctive Ring Used to set the RING signal pattern to start FAX reception 1
2 with Distinctive Ring. 1
3 0
Bit
1 2 3 4 5 Standard OFF
No.
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
3 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
4 Reserved 0
5 Footer Used to set ON/OFF of the footer attached under each page 0
data when printing received documents.
1 : ON 0 : OFF
6 Reserved 0
7 Telephone line kind Used to select the kind of telephone line (tone or pulse). Tone
1 : TONE 0 : PULSE
8 Reserved
9 – 27
AR-F151
SW Bit
No. No.
28 1 Used to set the silent detection time in the answering and 0
2 recording mode. 1
3 The set range is OFF and 1 to 10sec. 0
4 1
Time = 8 × Bit1 + 4 × Bit2 + 2 × Bit3 + 1 × Bit4 sec
Effective : 0(= OFF), 1 –10
5 Answering and recording mode Used to set whether FAX reception is started or not after 6 0
auto reception select call rings if the answering function does not work for some
reasons in the answering and recording mode.
1 : ON 0 : OFF
6 Annoying FAX prevention function Used to set ON/OFF of the annoying FAX prevention 0
function.
1 : ON 0 : OFF
7 Polling function Used to set whether one-touch key “20” is used as the 0
polling key or not.
1 : ON 0 : OFF
8 Reserved 0
29 1 Record paper size (Main Tray) Used to set the record paper size in the main tray. LTR
2
Bit No. Letter Legal A4 Other
1 0 0 1 1
2 0 1 0 1
3 Reserved 0
29 4 Record paper size (2nd Tray) Used to set the record paper size in the 2nd tray. A4 for AB series
5 LTR for Inch series
Bit No. Letter Legal A4 Other LTR
4 0 0 1 1
5 0 1 0 1
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
8 Index print Used to set whether marking is made to the lead edge of 1
paper or not to identify the job when printing the received
data.
1 : ON 0 : OFF
30 1 Reserved 0
2 Reserved 0
3 Reserved 0
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
8 Reserved 0
9 – 28
AR-F151
5. TROUBLE CODES
A. Trouble codes list
Main Sub
Trouble content Detail of trouble
code code
Duplex model memory setup error, The memory is not set properly or the memory capacity is not set to the duplex setup
E7 01 memory not-detected error (6M).
Cancel method: Set SIM 26-39 code number to 2.
HSYNC not detected. LSU (laser diode, reception element, APC circuit) trouble
E7 03
LSU drive circuit (ASIC) trouble
CCD white level trouble CCD drive circuit (CCD PWB, ASIC harness) trouble
E7 04
Copy lamp lighting trouble (Copy lamp, invertor PWB)
E7 05 CCD black level trouble CCD drive circuit (CCD PWB, ASIC, harness) trouble
E7 12 Shading trouble (White correction) Dirt on white plate for scanning white level
ASIC connection trouble Improper connection between CPU and ASIC (pattern cut, improper connection of lead
E7 14
pin)
E7 15 Copy lamp disconnection trouble Copy lamp or copy lamp drive circuit (invertor PWB) trouble Copy lamp disconnection
Feeding is not completed within When the mirror base is returned for the specified time (6 sec) in mirror initializing
the specified time after starting after turning on the power, the mirror home position sensor (MHPS) does not turn
L1 00
feeding. OFF. Or when the mirror base is fed for the specified time (about 6 sec) after start of
copy return, the mirror home position sensor (MHPS) does not turn OFF.
Return is not completed within the When the mirror base is returned for the specified time (6 sec) in mirror initializing
specified time. after turning on the power, the mirror home position sensor (MHPS) does not turn
L3 00
ON.Or when the mirror base is returned for the specified time (about 6 sec) after start
of copy return, the mirror home position sensor (MHPS) does not turn ON.
L4 01 Main motor lock When the main motor encoder pulse is not detected for 100msec.
Polygon motor lock The lock signal (specified rpm signal) does not return within a certain time (about
L6 10
20sec) from starting the polygon motor rotation
H2 00 Thermistor open detection The fusing thermistor is open.
Heat roller abnormally high The fusing temperature rises above 240˚C.
H3 00
temperature
Heat roller abnormally low The fusing temperature does not reach 185˚C within 27 sec of turning on the power,
H4 00
temperature or the fusing temperature keeps at 140˚C.
U2 01 Counter sum check error When the counter check sum value stored in the EEPROM is abnormal.
EEPROM serial communication When a communication trouble occurs with the EEPROM.
U2 04
error
Communication trouble with FAX Error in data reception from the FAX board to the MCU.
F6 80 PWB (Protocol) Occurs when the message header of the message format is other than F.
Cancel method: Turn OFF/ON the power.
PWB (Parity) Occurs when the odd number parity set with SMR (serial mode register) differs from
F6 81
the reception data.
Communication trouble with FAX Error in data reception from the FAX board to the MCU
PWB (Overrun) Occurs when the next data reception is completed with RDRF (Receive Data Register
F6 82
Full) flag of SS (Reserial status register) set to 1.
F6 84 PWB (Framing) Occurs when the stop bit is 0. (The stop bit must be 1.)
Communication trouble with FAX Occurs when time is out without response in data communication between the FAX
F6 88 PWB (Time-out) board and the MCU.
FAX PWB trouble Communication trouble between the MCU and the FAX board or between the FAX
F6 10 board and the FAX panel
Cancel method: Turn OFF/ON the power. Check connections.
9 – 29
AR-F151
[10] USER PROGRAM

The conditions of factory setting can be changed according to the use conditions.
Functions which can be set with the user program
Function Contents Factory setting
● When a certain time is passed after completion of copying, this function returns to the initial state
Auto clear. automatically. The time to reach the initial state can be set in the range of 30 sec to 120 sec by 60 sec
the unit of 30 sec. This function can be disabled.
● When the copier is left unused with the power ON, the power consumption is automatically reduced
to about 40Wh/H (∗ Note).
The time to start this function can be set in the range of 30 sec to 90 sec by the unit of 30 sec.
Pre-heat. This function cannot be disabled. 90 sec
● When this function is operated, the pre-heat lamp on the operation panel lights up.
To return to the initial state, press any key on the operation panel. (When the COPY button is
pressed, a copy is made after returning to the initial state.)
● When the copier is left unused with the power ON, the power consumption is automatically reduced
to about 18Wh/H (∗ Note). The time to start this function can be set in the range of 2 min to 120
Auto shut off passing min.
5 min
time. ● When this function is operated, all the lamps except for the pre-heat lamp on the operation panel
turn off.
To return to the initial state, press the COPY button.
Stream feeding. Only models with SPF. Set
Auto shut off setting ● Used to set or cancel this function. Set
∗Note: The power consumption values in pre-heat and auto shut off may be varied depending on the use conditions.
Change the setting. Function name Function code

Example: Changing the time to operate the auto shut off function Auto clear 1
(Change from 60 sec to 90 sec) Pre-heat 2
1. Press the right and the left exposure adjustment Auto shut off passing time 3
keys simultaneously to start setting.
Stream feeding 4✽
● Keep pressing the keys for five sec.
● Display lamps ( , , , blink simultaneously and “- -” Auto shut off setting 5
is displayed on the copy quantity display. [Cancel] If a wrong code is entered, press the clear key and enter the
2. Select the function code with the 10-digit key correct function code.
(copy quantity set key). ✽ SPF only
● The number of the selected function blinks on the digit of 10 on the 3. Press the COPY button.
copy quantity display. ● The number blinking on the digit of 10 of the coyp quantity display
● For auto clear, select “1.” is lighted.
● For setting, refer to the following function codes. ● The number of the current set code blinks on the digit of 1.
4. Select the setting code with 1-digit key (copy
quantity set key).
● To set to 90 sec, select “3.”
● For setting, refer to the following set codes.
Function Function Function Function Function

Set code Set code Set code Set code Set code
name name name name name
0 (Cancel) 0 (30 sec) 0 (2 min) 0 (Cancel) 0 (Cancel)
1 (30 sec) 1 (60 sec) ∗1 (5 min) ∗1 (Setting) ∗1 (Setting)
∗2 (60 sec) ∗2 (90 sec) Auto shut 2 (15 min) Stream Auto shut
Auto clear Pre-heat
off feeding off setting
3 (90 sec) 3 (30 min)
4 (120 sec) 4 (60 min)
5 (10 sec) 5 (120 min)
∗ : Factory setting [Note] To set another function, press the clear key after completion of
● The number of the selected set code blinks on the digit of 1 of the this operation and perform the procedure from 2.
copy quantity display. 6. Press either one of exposure adjustment keys
( or ) to complete the setting.
[Cancel] When a wrong number of the function code is set, press the
● Display lamps ( , , , ) go off and the copy quantity
clear key and perform the procedure again from 2.
display returns to the normal state.
5. Press the COPY button.
● The number blinking on the digit of 1 of the copy quantity display
is lighted up. This means the setting is completed.
10 – 1
AR-F151
Option
F-PUMA MCU PWB Overall block diagram
1. Block diagram
GDI MEMORY
A. Overall block diagram
CN26 CN16
SPF(AR-F151),
R-SPF(AR-155) CN9
UNIT
SRAM Toner Motor
CN30
CCD JITTER CN15
[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION
SYNC IC Option
GDI/USB
Reference AND FAX OPE PWB
UNIT
LASER CN23
Printed
CN5
Visual Data LSU
ASIC AND FAX PWB SPEAKER
Other Loads AND
AND Other Inputs
UART (AR-F151 Only)
MIRROR MHPS RTH TCS PSW1
MOTOR
MAIN
MOTOR POD PPD1 PPD2 PSW2
11 – 1
AND
VFM MMLD MHPS CED1
CRSM UNIT
RRS CPU DVSEL SDOD CED2
CPFS1 INTERLOCK SWITCH
MPFS
Duplex HL
Motor
COPY
(AR-155 Only) CN3
LAMP
CN20 RESET IC
AC PWB CN3
OPE PANEL
5V 12V 3.3V FM BIAS TC HLOUT
CN EPROM SRAM EEPROM 24V 5V GND MC GRIDL PR
902 MCU PWB

CRU Power High Voltage
Reset UNIT Control Unit
Switch
AC INPUT
AR-F151 MCU PWB UNIT LASER UNIT
SDOD
(LSU)
POLYGON SPF UNIT CCD PWB
MOTOR HSYNC GDI/USB
FAX OPE PWB FAX PWB GDI
/FAXPRQ UNIT MEMORY SPPD
/FAXACK CCDHI
B. MCU PWB unit
/VIDEO USB-EN
/SCANST SPID/SPUS
/FAXCSPMRDY PMCLK-A S/H etc.. CCDLO
/PRSTART /PMD /LDEN USB-ON USB-IN SB4D /SRRC etc..
/FAXREQ /SGS/SPFS CRSM UNIT
/POFF CN5 etc.. CN23 GDI-IN CN15 CN16 CN26 CN31 CN30
/FRTS
etc.. /1284-EN
TRAY EMPTY
DV SENSOR
DETECTOR CN1 IC104 IC13 IC12 DVSEL
/CED1 IC110
PAPER PAPER FEED IC105
CN7
CASSETTE1 SOLENOID IC109 CN17
PAPER WIDTH
/CPFS1 IC3 DEVELOPING BIAS
DETECTION CN10 PSW1 IC104 IC8 /BIAS
IC105 IC103 IC105
/CED2 IC8 IC106
TRAY EMPTY IC103 IC105
DETECTOR
IC106 CN17
IC111
PAPER PAPER FEED CN6 IC3 IC16
CASSETTE2 SOLENOID /CPFS2 GRID CONTROL
PAPER WIDTH
DETECTION HIGH VOLTAGE TRANSFER CHARGER
IC102 CONTROL UNIT
PSW2 IC2 MAIN CHARGER
IC10
ASIC ELECTRIC
IC9 (HG73CO25FD) FW SOURCE
IC113 IC113 CN3
CPU POWER
(H8S/2350) /PR RELAY
11 – 2
IC3
PAPER IC105 HEATER
MANUAL DETECTOR MFD HLOUT
IC8 LAMP
PAPER CN12
PAPER FEED IC3 FTH
FEED
SOLENOID /MPFS
THERMISTOR
RESIST ROLLER CN11 IC3
SOLENOID 5V(DSWS) INTERLOCK
/RRS IC103
IC105 CN4 24V(DSWS)
PAPER EXIT
POD
CN22 IC109 INTERLOCK
DETECTOR
IC101
IC105 RTH-IN
IC106 IC8
IC108 IC103 IC113 IC12 IC105 IC1 IC3 IC2 IC103 CN13
PAPER DETECTOR2
(In FUSER UNIT)
PPD2
CN20 CN18 CN27 CN28 CN17 CN9 CN21 CN25 CN14
PSW OP-CLK MMLD /MM TCS TMa-O /CL PPD1
KIN1 OP-LATCH MHPS TMb-O VFMOUT
KIN2 OP-DATA MAIN MIRROR /VFMCNT COPY
MOTOR MAIN MIRROR TONER TONER LAMP PAPER DETECTOR1
HOME
LOCK MOTOR MOTOR CONTROL MOTOR (Near RESIST ROLLER)
KEY POSITION VENCH RATION
DRST DETECTOR SENSOR
SENSOR FAN MOTOR
OPE PWB
NEW PROCESS UNIT SENSOR

AR-F151
FAX PWB UNIT
FTXD
FRTS
SOD LCD PWB IC510
AR-F151
CN501 SID SCAN

POFF
SCK MEMORY
16Mbit DRAM READYPRSTART
PANEL RESET
IC503 Image etc..
System IC505 BUS
controller LC8213 IC506 SCDACK
NS FX200 I/F
PWOFF ASIC
IC512
IC507 Image VSYNC Scan Date
LD BUS
CPU MEMORY C
RESET 256kbit SRAM READY
NS FX164 N MCU
C. FAX PWB unit (AR-F151 only)
FAXPRO 6 PWB
FAXCS Print Date 0
FAXACK 1
IC504 FCTS
Main CPU BUS 12V 12V
etc..
MEMORY IC509 5V
16Mbit DRAM LCAS,UCAS
FAX 3.3V
IC601
ASIC IC508 5V
C515 PLL 3.3V

CGS410 IC513
SUPER
Capacitor
IC514
RESET
IC515
11 – 3
Print -12V -5V
Memory
IC502 16Mbit DRAM
EPROM LIU circuit primary
8Mbit side of the line
Modem circuit
secondary On-hook
Line Capa- detection
IC501 side of the line citor Protection Telephone
trans- element
Configuration Relay line
former
RAM Sigma-delta circuit Line
64kbit SRAM IC606/IC605 Ring jack
detection Relay
Photo coupler CN502
External (for US)
telephone
Bypass circuit communi-
IC602 Delta-sigma circuit cation
Clock IC IC606/IC516/IC607 DC load

NJM6355
C
N
5
BT501 Speaker circuit 0
Lithium 3
IC605/IC609/IC608
Battery BUZON
C
BZ1 N
5 SPEAKER
0
1
AR-F151
2. Circuit descriptions
A. Man PWB (MCU)
(1) CPU signal table
PIN Signal PIN Signal
Input/output Operating Input/output Operating
No. code No. code
1 /CS1 Output Chip Select for SRAM 39 5V
2 /CS0 Output Chip Select for EPROM Data
40 D0 Data Bus
input/output
3 D-GND
Data
4 D-GND 41 D1 Data Bus
input/output
5 5V
Data
42 D2 Data Bus
6 A0 Output Address Bus (NC-pull up) input/output
7 A1 Output Address Bus Data

43 D3 Data Bus
input/output
8 A2 Output Address Bus
44 D-GND
Data
10 D-GND 45 D4 Data Bus
input/output
46 D5 Data Bus
12 A5 Output Address Bus input/output

47 D6 Data Bus
input/output
Data
15 A8 Output Address Bus 48 D7 Data Bus
input/output
49 D8 Data Bus

50 D9 Data Bus
input/output
19 D-GND
Data
input/output
52 D11 Data Bus
input/output
53 D-GND
Data
input/output
Data
55 D13 Data Bus
27 A19 Output Address Bus (NC-pull up) Data
56 D14 Data Bus
input/output
28 D-GND
Data
29 A20 Output Address Bus (NC-pull up) 57 D15 Data Bus
input/output
30 NC-pull up
58 5V
Interruption
31 (SPPD) SPF Paper Pass Detector (OP- Data Signal for Operation
level input 59 Output
DATA) Panel
32 USB-IN Input USB Connector-In Detect
60 FTXD Output TXD for Additional Board
Interruption
33 (MHPS) Mirror Home Position Sensor 61 FRTS Output RTS for Additional Board
level input
62 FRXD Input RXD for Additional Board
/CPU Interruption Horizontal Synchronous (from
34
SYNC level input G/A) 63 (OP-CLK) Output Clock for Operation Panel
35 D-GND Power Supply Signal for Toner
64 TMON Output
Motor Driver IC
36 D-GND
65 D-GND
Interruption
37 ZC Zero-cross signal
level input 66 FCTS Input CTS for Additional Board
Interruption 67 D-GND
38 /ASICINT Intterupt from G/A
level input
68 D-GND
11 – 4
AR-F151
PIN Signal PIN Signal

Input/output Operating Input/output Operating
No. code No. code
69 PSW Input Print switch input 110 SIN4 Input Sensor input 4
70 KIN1 Input Key input 1 Analog Reference Voltage (High) for
111 DAH
output CCD
71 KIN2 Input Key input 2
Analog Reference Voltage (Low) for
72 TMCLK Timer output Clock for Toner Motor 112 DAL
output CCD
73 /TMEN Output On-Off Control for Toner Motor
113 AN-GND
Power Off Signal for
74 /POFF Output 114 D-GND
Additional Board
115 DMT-3 Motor output Duplex Motor Excitement
75 PMCLK Timer output Clock for Polygon Motor
/PRSTART
76 Output Printing Start Signal
77 /SCANSP Output Scaning Stop Signal 118 DMT-0 Motor output Duplex Motor Excitement
78 /SCANST Output Scaning Start Signal 119 MRMT3 Motor output Mirror Motor Excitement
Output 120 MRMT2 Motor output Mirror Motor Excitement
On-Off Control for Heatrer
79 HL (Timer
Lamp 121 MRMT1 Motor output Mirror Motor Excitement
output)
122 MRMT0 Motor output Mirror Motor Excitement
WDTOVF-
80 Output Watchdog Timer
CPU MODE SET <MODE 4> -
123 Input
GND
81 RES- Input Reset
82 Input pull up 124 Input
GND
83 Input pull up
125 Input
84 5V Vcc
85 XTAL Clock 126 NC-pull up
86 EXTAL Clock 127 DRST Input Drum reset detection
87 D-GND 128 /CS2 Output Chip Select for ASIC
88 CPUCLK Output System Clock for G/A ∗ The signals which are hatched are added or revised to or from the
89 5V AL-1000.
90 /AS Output pull up

91 /RD Output Read Signal
92 /HWR Output Write Signal (High Address)
93 /LWR Output Write Signal (Low Address)
94 SELIN3 Output Input select 3
97 PR Output Power relay control PR
98 RRS Output Resist roller solenoid RPC
99 D-GND
100 D-GND
101 SCLK Output Clock Line for EEPROM
102 SDA Output Data Line for EEPROM
103 A5V
104 Analog Reference Voltage-A5V
105 RTH Analog input Fusing Thermister
106
107 SIN1 Input Sensor input 1
11 – 5
AR-F151
(2) ASIC (Signal table)

PIN No. Signal name IN/OUT Connected to Description
1 /SCANSP IN CPU (I/O) Scanner process interrupt signal
2 /PRSTART IN CPU Print start trigger signal
3 /TMEN IN CPU Toner motor ON/OFF
4 TMCLK IN CPU Toner motor reference clock
5 3.3V Power
6 CPUAD7 IN CPU CPU address bus
8 GND Power
14 /CPUSYNC OUT CPU Horizontal synchronization signal
15 /ASICINT OUT CPU Interruption request signal
16 /CS2 IN CPU CPU chip select signal
17 /RESET IN RESET IC Reset signal
18 5V Power
19 GND Power
20 3.3V Power
21 GND Power
22 MDATA15 IN/OUT DRAM Data bus of DRAM (page memory)
31 3.3V Power
34 GND Power
40 /RAS0 OUT DRAM RAS signal 0 of DRAM (page memory)
DRAM control (for
43 /RAS64 OUT (Reserved)
panther)
44 3.3V Power
DRAM control (for
45 /RAS16 OUT (Reserved)
panther)
46 MAD0 OUT DRAM Address bus of DRAM (page memory)
11 – 6
AR-F151

47 GND Power
57 3.3V Power
60 GND Power
61 /CAS0 OUT DRAM CAS signal of DRAM (page memory)
62 /CAS1 OUT DRAM CAS signal of DRAM (page memory)
63 /OE OUT DRAM Read enable signal of DRAM (page memory)
64 /WE OUT DRAM Write enable signal of DRAM (page memory)
65 OUTD0 OUT FAX board data bus Transmission data 0 to expanded board
69 3.3V Power
72 GND Power
83 /HSYNC OUT PCL, FAX board Horizontal sync signal with print area output only
84 /PCLPRD IN PCL board Print video data (serial) from PCL board
85 /PCLREQ OUT PCL board DREQ signal to PCL board
86 /PCLACK IN PCL board ACK signal from PCL board
87 /PCLCS IN PCL board
88 3.3V Power
89 GND Power
90 5V Power
91 GND Power
92 /FAXPRD IN FAX board Print video data (serial) from FAX board
93 /FAXREQ OUT FAX board DREQ signal to FAX board
94 /FAXACK IN FAX board ACK signal from FAX board
95 3.3V Power
11 – 7
AR-F151

96 /FAXCS IN FAX board OUTD bus enable signal H bus impedance HIGH state
∗
Electric sort board
97 /ESPRD IN (Reserved) (Reserved)
98 GND Power
∗
Electric sort board
99 /ESREQ OUT (Reserved) (Reserved)
∗
Electric sort board
100 /ESACK IN (Reserved) (Reserved)
∗
Electric sort board
101 /ESCS IN (Reserved) (Reserved)
102 PARAD0 IN/OUT 1284 board connector DATA bus (IEEE1284 communication port)
108 5V Power
111 GND Power
112 /REV OUT 1284 board connector ECP mode I/O select (LOW:P → H)
113 INIT IN 1284 board connector INIT signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
114 /SLCTIN IN 1284 board connector /SLCTIN signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
115 /AUTOFD IN 1284 board connector /AUTOFD signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
116 /STB IN 1284 board connector /STB signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
117 /ACK OUT 1284 board connector /ACK signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
118 BUSY OUT 1284 board connector BUSY signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
119 PE OUT 1284 board connector PE signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
120 /FAULT OUT 1284 board connector /FAULT signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
121 5V Power
122 SLCT OUT 1284 board connector /SLCTIN signal (IEEE1284 communication port)
123 /TESTPIN0 IN TEST PIN High: Normal Low: Test
124 GND Power
125 PFCLK IN Transmitter Write clock
126 /TESTPIN1 IN TEST PIN High: Normal Low: Test
JITTER
127 /SYNCEN OUT Jitter adjustment IC trigger signal
ADJUSTMENT IC
128 SD10 IN/OUT SRAM (separation) Data line to SRAM before are separation
133 5V Power
136 GND Power
138 SOE1 OUT SRAM (separation) Read enable line to SRAM before area separation
139 SWE1 OUT SRAM (separation) Write enable line to SRAM before area separation
140 SCS1 OUT SRAM (separation) Chip select line to SRAM before area separation
11 – 8
AR-F151

141 SOE0 OUT SRAM (separation) Read enable line to SRAM before area separation
142 SWE0 OUT SRAM (separation) Write enable line to SRAM before area separation
143 SCS0 OUT SRAM (separation) Chip select line to SRAM before area separation
146 5V Power
149 GND Power
154 SAD0 OUT SRAM (separation) Address line to SRAM before area separation
162 GND Power
169 /f1 OUT CCD PWB CCD drive signal transfer clock (First phase)
170 /f2 OUT CCD PWB CCD drive signal transfer clock (Second phase)
171 /SH OUT CCD PWB CCD drive signal shift pulse
172 5V Power
173 RS OUT CCD PWB CCD drive signal reset pulse
174 SP OUT CCD PWB CCD drive signal sampling hold pulse
175 GND Power
176 CP OUT CCD PWB A/D conversion IC latch clock
177 BCLK OUT CCD PWB CCD shield output latch signal
CCD PWB (AD
178 IDIN0 IN Image scan data (after 8bit A/D conversion)
conversion)
CCD PWB (AD
conversion)
CCD PWB (AD
conversion)
CCD PWB (AD
conversion)
CCD PWB (AD
conversion)
CCD PWB (AD
conversion)
CCD PWB (AD
conversion)
11 – 9
AR-F151

185 5V Power
CCD PWB (AD
conversion)
187 /SDCLK OUT CHECK Effective image area signal
188 GND Power
189 SFCLK IN Transmitter CCD drive clock (48MHz), Also used as an internal clock.
190 TEST port 0 IN AUTO SCAN TEST High: Normal Low: Test
191 /SYNC IN LSU Horizontal synchronization signal (HSYNC) from LSU
192 /LD OUT LSU Laser drive signal
193 /LEND OUT LSU Laser APC signal
194 USB-EN OUT GDI/USB PWB USB port enable signal
195 1284-EN OUT GDI/USB PWB 1284 port enable signal
196 PORTOUT26 OUT (Not used)
197 3.3V Power
200 GND Power
201 SGS OUT Tr array IC SPF gate solenoid
202 SRRC OUT Tr array IC SPF resist roller solenoid
203 SPUS OUT Tr array IC SPF PU solenoid
204 /READY OUT FAX PWB READY signal (Expansion PWB)
205 OP-LATCH OUT Tr array IC Latch signal for operation circuit. Data latch at LOW.
206 MRPS2 OUT Tr array IC Mirror speed control signal. Mirror speed 2 at LOW.
207 MRPS1 OUT Tr array IC Mirror speed control signal. Mirror speed 1 at LOW.
208 SPFS OUT Tr array IC SPF paper feed solenoid
209 SMSEL OUT Tr array IC SPF motor/Mirror motor select signal
210 3.3V Power
211 TC OUT Tr array IC Transfer charger control signal. ON at HIGH.
212 GRIDL OUT Tr array IC Main charger grid control signal. ON at HIGH.
213 GND Power
214 MC OUT Tr array IC Main charger control signal. ON at HIGH.
215 BIASL OUT Tr array IC DV bias voltage control signal. ON at HIGH.
216 BIASH OUT Tr array IC DV bias voltage control signal. ON at HIGH.
217 BIAS OUT Tr array IC DV bias output control signal. ON at HIGH.
218 CL OUT Tr array IC Copy lamp control signal. ON at HIGH.
Ventilation fan rotating speed control signal. Low speed at HIGH, high
219 VFMCNT OUT Tr array IC
speed at LOW.
220 VFM OUT Tr array IC Ventilation fan control signal. Fan ON at HIGH.
221 LDEN OUT Tr array IC Laser circuit control signal. Laser circuit ON at HIGH.
222 PMD OUT Tr array IC Polygon motor control signal. Polygon motor ON at HIGH.
223 5V Power
224 MM OUT Tr array IC Main motor control signal. Main motor ON at HIGH.
Manual paper feed solenoid control signal. Multi paper feed ON at
225 MPFS OUT Tr array IC
HIGH.
226 GND Power
Second cassette paper feed solenoid control signal. Second cassette
227 CPFS2 OUT Tr array IC
paper feed at HIGH.
Cassette paper feed solenoid control signal. One-stage cassette paper
228 CPFS1 OUT Tr array IC
feed at HIGH.
229 TM OUT Tr array IC Toner motor drive output (+)
11 – 10
AR-F151

230 TM_ OUT Tr array IC Toner motor drive output (–)
231 CPUD15 IN/OUT CPU CPU data bus
236 5V Power
239 GND Power
249 3.3V Power
250 /CPUWR IN CPU CPU write signal
251 /CPURD IN CPU CPU read signal
252 GND Power
253 CPUCLK IN CPU CPU system clock
254 GND Power
255 TEST PORT1 IN AUTO SCAN TEST High: Normal Low: Test
256 /SCANST IN CPU (I/O) Scanner process start signal
∗ The signals which are hatched are added or revised to or from AL-1000.
(3) Expanded PWB interface section
The MCU PWB and the expanded PWB are connected by CN5 connector to make serial communication (UART).
The FAX PWB uses signals in Table A, and the PCL PWB uses signals in Table B.
Recognition of FAX PWB or PCL PWB:
If /FREADY is LOW, the FAX PWB expansion is recognized.
If /PREADY is LOW, the PCL PWB expansion is recognized.
PCL/FAX CN
CN5
1 31
R128 10J 2 32 R130 10J

/SCLINE /PRLINE
3 33 /PRSTART (1-D2)
C141 /FPAGE
4 34 /PAGE (7-E2)
(1-D4) /SCANST /PREADY /FREADY
18p (7-E1) /PREADY 35 /FREADY (7-E2) 10J
5 R131
FTXD /READY
(7-E1) FTXD 6 36 /READY (5-A3)
/FRTS FRXD
7 37 FRXD (7-E1)
/FCTS
(7-E2)/FRTS 8 38 /FCTS (7-D1)
C140 C142
9 39
10 40
41 18p 18p
11
F-RESET
(1-E1) /F-RESET 12 42 R132 10J
/HSYNC /POFF
(5-E2) /HSYNC 13 43 /POFF (1-C1)
OUTD1 OUTD0
(5-E1) OUTD1 14 44 OUTD0 (5-E1)
OUTD3 OUTD2
(5-E1) OUTD3 15 45 OUTD2 (5-E1)
OUTD5 OUTD4 C143
(5-E2) OUTD5 16 46 OUTD4 (5-E2)
OUTD7 OUTD6
(5-E2) OUTD7 17 47 OUTD6 (5-E2)
OUTD9 OUTD8
(5-E2) OUTD9 48 OUTD8 (5-E2) 18p
18
OUTD11 OUTD10 C134 C135 C137
(5-E2) OUTD11 19 49 OUTD10 (5-E2)
OUTD13 OUTD12
(5-E2) OUTD13 20 50 OUTD12 (5-E2)
OUTD15 OUTD14
(5-E2) OUTD15 51 OUTD14 (5-E2) 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u
21
/PCLREQ /PCLPRD
(5-E2) /PCLREQ 22 52 /PCLPRD (5-E2)
/PCLCS /PCLACK 12V
(5-E2) /PCLCS 23 53 /PCLACK (5-E2)
/FAXREQ /FAXPRD 5V
(5-E2) /FAXREQ 24 54 /FAXPRD (5-E2)
/FAXCS /FAXACK 3.3V
(5-E2) /FAXCS 25 55 /FAXACK (5-E2) L2 SBO-02SAN
26 56
27 57
L3 SBO-02SAN
28 58
29 59 L1 SBO-02SAN
30 60
TX25-60P-23ST-H1
C3 C119 C5 C117 C2
C118
0.1u 47u 25V 0.1u 47u 16V 0.1u 47u 16V
11 – 11
AR-F151
Table A (Signals used in the FAX PWB) Table B (Signals used in PCL PWB)
PIN No. Signal PIN No. Signal

IN/OUT Descriptions IN/OUT Descriptions
(CN5) name (CN5) name
3 /SCLINE OUT Effective input image area 5 /PREADY IN PCL PWB recognition signal
6 FTXD OUT Serial communication data 6 FTXD OUT Serial communication data
Serial reception ready Serial reception READY
7 /FRTS OUT 7 /FRTS OUT
(Machine side) (Machine side)
12 /F-RESET OUT Reset signal 12 /F-RESET OUT Reset signal
13 /HSYNC OUT Horizontal sync signal 13 /HSYNC OUT Horizontal sync signal
14 ∼ 21, OUTD1 ∼ 34 /FPAGE IN Page data READY
OUT Data to the expanded PWB
44 ∼ 51 OUTD15
READY signal on the
36 /READY OUT
24 /FAXREQ OUT Data transfer REQ signal machine side
25 /FAXCS IN OUTD bus enable signal 37 FRXD IN Serial communication data
33 /PRLINE OUT Effective print area Serial reception READY
38 /FCTS IN
(PCL side)
34 /FPAGE IN Page data READY
52 /PCLPRD IN Video data from PCL PWB
35 /FREADY IN FAX PWB recognition signal
READY signal on the (4) 1284/USB circuit select control section
36 /READY OUT
machine side
The GDI/USB PWB is connected to CN15 connector to control switch-
37 FRXD IN Serial communication data ing between IEEE1284 port and USB port.
Serial reception READY If USB cable isn’t connected to the GDI/USB PWB, the /1284-EN signal
38 /FCTS IN becomes LOW to allow the user of IEEE1284 port.
(FAX side)
43 /POFF OUT Power OFF signal If USB cable is connected, the /USB-EN signal becomes LOW to allow
54 /FAXPRD IN Video data from FAX PWB the use of USB port.
Since USB has priority, when USB cable is connected, it is selected.
55 /FAXACK IN Data transfer ACK signal That is, when USB cable is connected, IEEE1284 port (parallel port) is
disabled.
GDI/USB CN
5V
CN15
(5-D2) PARAAD0 4
(5-D2) PARAAD1 5
(5-D2) PARAAD2 6
(5-D2) PARAAD3 7
(5-D2) PARAAD4 8
(5-D2) PARAAD5 9
(5-D2) PARAAD6 10
(5-D2) PARAAD7 11
(5-D3) /REV 12
(5-D3) INIT 13
(5-D3) /SLCTIN 14
(5-D3) /AUTOFD 15
(5-D3) /STB 16
(5-D3) /ACK 17
(5-D3) BUSY 18
(5-D3) PE 19
(5-D3) /FAULT 20
(5-D3) SLCT 21
(2-D3) /GDI-IN 22
23
24
25
26
(5-A3)
USB-IN 27
(1-B1)
/USB-EN 28
3.3V (5-A3)
USB-ON 29
(5-A3)
/1284-EN 30
31
31FT-BT-VK-N
11 – 12
AR-F151
3. FAX PWB Functional block diagram (AR-F151 only)
Speaker
LCD PWB NCU PSTN
Prog.ROM FX164 FX200 Main Memory
CPU Bus
LC8213
Image. Bus
PCL/FAX MCU PWB LZ9FH19
Buf. Mem.
SCAN Image. ASIC
DATA Memory
Memory
PRINT DATA
4. LSI pin layout (AR-F151 only)

(1) NSFX200 (IC503) pin layout
132-Pin FQFP Package
GNDD6
GNDD8
GNDD7
VCCD8
VCCD7
VCCD6
CWAIT
HOLD
HLCA
RAS0
RAS1
MA10
MA11
MA12
MA13
MA14
MA15
SEL0
SEL3
SEL1
WE0
WE1
MA9
CAS
MA1
MA2
MA3
MA4
MA5
MA6
MA7
MA8
OE
115 113 111 109 107 105 103 101 99 98 97 96 95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84

116 114 112 110 108 106 104 102 100
HBE 117 83 VCCA2
ADS 118 82 GNDA2
DDIN 119 81 PTMP
AD0 120 80 SBG
AD1 121 79 SCVO
AD2 122 78 SVI
AD3 123 77 GNDA1
AD4 124 76 VCCA1
VCCD9 125 75 GNDD5
AD5 126 74 PMPH0
AD6 127 73 PMPH1
AD7 128 72 PMPH2
AD8 129 71 PMPH3
AD9 130 70 SMPH0
GNDD9 131 69 SMPH1
AD10 132 68 SMPH2
AD11 1 67 SMPH3
AD12 2 66 VCCD5
AD13 3 65 PEXT
AD14 4 64 PFAIL
VCCD1 5 63 SOSCO
AD15 6 62 SOSCI
A16 7 61 RST
A17 8 60 WDT
A18 9 59 BUZCLK
A19 10 58 DMRQ3
GNDD1 11 57 MWSI
A20 12 56 URXD
A21 13 55 UTEN
A22 14 54 PIO0
A23 15 53 PIO1
PDO 16 52 SNH
VCCD2 17 51 GNDD4
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
SDOUT
GNDD2
GNDD3
INTR
FOSCI
FOSCO
VCCD3
INT0
INT1
INT2
INT3
SPDW
SDIN
UREN
UTXD
MWSO
SDFDBK
SDIS
CCLK
CTTL
VCCD4
MWSK
PCLK
DMAK3
DMAK1
SLS
STB2
STB1
STB0
SBYPS
SCLK1
SCLK2
STB3
TL/EE/11331-54
11 – 13
AR-F151
NSFX200 (IC503) supplies Output Signals

Signal Pin Numbers Descrlption Signal Pin Numbers Description
GNDA1 ∼ 2 77 82 Analog ground. BUZCLK 59 Buzzer Clock —
GNDD1 ∼ 9 11 25 38 Digital ground. Programmable frequency
51 75 90 clock for the buzzer.
102 116 131 CAS 104 DRAM Column Address
VCCA1 ∼ 2 76 83 Analog Power — 5V supply Strobe — Column address
for analog circuits. strobe for DRAM banks
refresh.
VCCD1 ∼ 9 5 17 32 Digital Power — 5V supply
50 66 84 for digital circuits. CCLK 39 CPU Double Clock — Feeds
96 109 125 CPU’S OSCIN. Asynchronous.
CWAIT 103 Continuous Walt — Low
Input Signals extends the memory cycle of
the CPU.
Signal Pin Numbers Description
DMAK1 28 General purpose output pin.
CTTL 33 CPU Clock — CPU clock that
is used for clocking the DMAK3 26 DMA Acknowledge —
NS32FX200. Output for DMA channel 3
DMRQ3 58 DMA Request — Input for acknowledge or general
DMA channel 3 request. purpose output pin.
FOSCI 36 High-Speed Oscillator — FOSCO 37 High-Speed Oscillator Out —

(49.1520 MHz) Asynchronous. Asynchronous.This line is
When an external oscillator is used as the return path for
used, FOSCO should be left the crystal (if used).
unconnected or loaded with HOLD 115 Hold Request — When low,
no more than 5 pF of stray HOLD requests the bus from
capacitance. the CPU to perform DMA
HBE 117 High Byte Enable — Status operations or to insert idle
signal used to enable data bus cycles.
transfers on the most
INTR 44 Interrupt Request — Low
significant byte of the data bus.
indicates that an interrupt
HLDA 114 Hold Acknowledge — Issued request is being output to the
by the CPU to indicate it has CPU.
released the bus in response
MA1 ∼ 15 101 100 99 Memory Address Bus —
to a HOLD request.
98 97 95 Multiplexed DRAM address.
INT0 ∼ 3 40 41 42 Interrupt In — Asynchronous. 94 93 92
43 External maskable prioritized 91 89 88
interrupt requests. 87 86 85
MWSI 57 General purpose input pin.
MWSK 24 General purpose output pin.
PFAIL 64 Power Fall Indication — An
OE 111 Output Enable — Used by
asynchronous signal which
the addressed device to gate
forces the NS32FX 200 into
the data onto the data bus.
freeze mode.
PTMP 81 Not used. PDO 16 Not used.
RST 61 Reset In — Asynhronous PEXT 65 Not used.
reset input from the CPU. PMPH0 ∼ 3 74 73 72 Output port.
SBG 80 Not used. 71
SDIN 19 Sigma-Delta Data In — RAS0 106 DRAM Row Address
Asynchronous input from the Strobes — Row address
SDC analog receiver. strobe for DRAM banks 0
SOSCI 62 Low-Speed Oscillator — and 1.
(3.2768 kHz or 455 kHz) RAS1 105 RAS1 is not used.
Asynchronous. When an
external oscillator is used, SCLK1 22 General purpose output pin.
SOSCO should be left SCLK2/DAMK0 29 Scanner Clock 2 — Output,
unconnected or loaded with DMA Acknowledge-output for
no more than 5 pF of stray DMA channel 0 acknowledge.
capacitance.
SCVO 79 Scanner Compensated
SVI 78 Scanner Video In — Analog Video Out — Analog current
current from the scanner for use by ABC or optional
sample and hold circuit. video enhanement circuit.
URXD 56 UART Recelve —
SDFDBK 18 Sigma-Delta Feedback —
Asynchronous input or general
Feedback input to the SDC
purpose input pin.
analog receiver.
UTEN 55 General purpose input pin. Asynchronous output signal.
11 – 14
AR-F151
Signal Pin Numbers Description (2) NS32FX164 (IC507)

SDIS/DMAK2 27 General purpose output pin.
SDOUT 20 Sigma-Delta Data Out — 68-Pin PCC Package
Input to the SDC analog
IOUT
GND
GND
VCC
BPU
NMI
ST1
ST0
A23
A22
A21
A20
A19
U/S
INT
ILO
IAS
transmitter.
SEL0 108 Zone Select — Used to 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
adderss the device according
SEL1 110 ST2 9 27 A18
to the selected zone.
ST3 8 28 A17
SEL3 107
PFS 7 29 A16
SLS 21 General purpose output pin. DDIN 6 30 VCC
ADS 5 31 AD15
SMPH0 ∼ 3 70 69 68 Output port. SPC 4 32 AD14
67 VCC 3 33 AD13
HBE 2 NS32FX164 34 AD12
SOSCO 63 Low-Speed Oscillator Out —
HOLDA 1 NS32FV16 35 AD11
Asynchronous. This line is HOLD 68 36 AD10
NS32FX161
used as the return path for RSTO 67 37 AD9
the crystal (if used). RES 66 38 AD8
RES 65 39 GND
SPDW 23 General purpose output pin.
CWAIT 64 40 AD7
STB0-3 35 34 31 General purpose output pin. GND 63 41 AD6
30 OSCIN 62 42 AD5
RSTI 61 43 AD4
WDT 60 WATCHDOG Trap — Traps
CPU execution when 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44
WATCHDOG detects error.
OSCOUT
WR
RD
GND
VCC
GND
VCC
TSO
DBE
FCLK
CTTL1
CTTL2
AD0
AD2
ALE
AD1
AD3
WEO 113 Write Enable — Used by the
addressed device to get the
WE1 112
data from the data bus.WE0
for even and WE1 for odd Supplles
bytes. VCC Power
+5 V positive supply.
GND Ground.
Input/Output Signals Ground reference for both on-chip logic and output
Signal Pin Numbers Description drivers.
A16 ∼ 23 7 8 9 High Order Address Bus — Input Signals

10 12 13 The most significant eight bits RSTI Reset Input.
14 15 of the CPU address bus. Schmitt triggered, asynchronous signal used to generate a
AD0 ∼ 15 120 121 122 Address/Data bus — CPU reset.
123 124 126 Multiplexed address/data Note: The reset signal is a true asynchronous input.
127 128 129 information. Therefore, no external synchronizing circuit is
130 132 1 needed.
2 3 4 HOLD Hold Request.
6 When active, causes the CPU to release the bus for DMA
or multiprocessing purposes.
ADS 118 Address Strobe — Controls Note: If the HOLD signal is generated asynchronously, its
memory access, and signals set up and hold times may be violated. In this case,
the beginning of a bus cycle. it is recommended to synchronize it with CTTL to
DDIN 119 Data Direction In — minimize the possibility of metastable states.The
Indicates the direction of data CPU provides only one synchronization stage to
transfer during a bus cycle. minimize the HLDA latency. This is to avoid speed
degradations in cases of heavy HOLD activity (i.e.,
MWSO 47 General purpose I/O pin.
DMA controller cycles interleaved with CPU
PCLK/DMRQ1 49 General purpose I/O pin. cycles).
INT Interrupt.
PIO0-1 54 53 General Purpose I/O Pins.
A low level on this pin requests a maskable interrupt. INT
SBYPS/DMRQ2 48 General purpose I/O pin. must be kept asserted until the interrupt is acknowledged.
NMI Non-Maskable Interrupt.
SNH/DMRQ0 52 Sample and Hold — Output A High-to-Low transition on this signal requests a non-
maskable interrupt.
to scanner sample and hold
Note: INT and NMI are true asynchronous inputs. There-
circuit or DMA Request-input
fore, no external synchronizing circuit is needed.
for DMA channel 0 reques.
CWAIT Continuous Walt.
UREN 45 General purpose I/O pin. Causes the CPU to insert continuous wait states if
UTXD 46 UART Transmit — Output. sampled low at the end of T2 and each following T-State.
OSCIN Crystal/External Clock Input.
Input from a crystal or an external clock source.
11 – 15
AR-F151
Output Signals (3) LC8213K (IC505) Pin Layout

A16 ∼ A23 ∗ High-Order Address Bits.
I: Input pin
These are the most significant 8 bits of the memory ad- O: Output pin
dress bus.
B: Bidirectional pin
HBE ∗ High Byte Enable.
P: Power pin
Status signal used to enable data transfers on the most NC: Not connected
significant byte of the data bus.
ST0 ∼ 3 Status.
No. Pin name Type No. Pin name Type
Not used.
U/S User/Supervisor. 1 CS I 41 AEN O
Not used. 2 RD I 42 AST O
ILO Interlocked Operation.
3 WR I 43 MDEN O
Not used.
HLDA Hold Acknowledge. 4 A2 I 44 MRD O
Activated by the CPU in response to the HOLD input to in- 5 A1 I 45 MWR O
dicate CPU has released the bus.
6 A0 I 46 IORD O
PFS Program Flow Status.
A pulse on this signal indicates the beginning of execution 7 VDD P 47 IOWR O
of instruction. 8 NC 48 LDE O
BPU BPU Cycle.
Not used. 9 D7 B 49 UDE O
RSTO Reset Output. 10 D6 B 50 READY I
This signal becomes active when RSTI is low, initiating a 11 D5 B 51 DTC O
system reset.
RD Read Strobe. 12 D4 B 52 VSS P
Activated during CPU or DMA read cycles to enable read- 13 VSS P 53 NC
ing of data from memory or peripherals.
14 D3 B 54 MA23 O
WR Write Strobe.
Activated during CPU or DMA write cycles to enable writ- 15 D2 B 55 MA22 O
ing of data to memory or peripherals. 16 D1 B 56 MA21 O
TSO Timing State Output.
17 D0 B 57 MA20 O
Not used.
DBE Data Buffers Enable. 18 NC 58 MA19 O
Used to control external data buffers. It is active when the 19 NC 59 MA18 O
data buffers are to be enabled.
20 IREQ O 60 MA17 O
OSCOUT Crystal Output.
Not used. 21 DREQ O 61 MA16 O
IAS SPecial Cycle Address Strobe. 22 DACK I 62 MA/MD15 O
Not used.
23 NC 63 VSS P
CTTL1 – 2 System Clock.
Output clock for bus timing. CTTL1 and CTTL2 must be 24 NC 64 MA/MD14 B
externally connected together. 25 NC 65 MA/MD13 B
FCLK Fast Clock.
Not used. 26 NC 66 MA/MD12 B
ALE Address Latch Enable. 27 RESET I 67 MA/MD11 B
Active high signal that can be used to control external ad- 28 CLK I 68 MA/MD10 B
dress latches.
IOUT Interrupt Output 29 VSS P 69 MA/MD9 B
Not used. 30 TEST4 I 70 MA/MD8 B
Input-Output Signals 31 VDD P 71 MA/MD7 B

AD0 ∼ 15 * Address/Data Bus. 32 TEST3 I 72 VSS P
Multiplexed Address/Data Information. Bit 0 is the least 33 TEST2 I 73 VDD P
significant bit of each.
34 TEST1 I 74 MA/MD6 B
SPC Slave Processor Control.
Not used. 35 TEST0 I 75 MA/MD5 B
DDIN * Data Direction. 36 NC 76 MA/MD4 B
Status signal indicating the direction of the data transfer
during a bus cycle. During HOLD acknowledge this signal 37 BREQ O 77 MA/MD3 B
becomes an input and determines the activation of RD or 38 BACK I 78 MA/MD2 B
WR. 39 IDREQ I 79 MA/MD1 B
ADS * Address Strobe
Controls address latches; signals the beginning of a bus 40 IDACK O 80 MA/MD0 B
cycle. During HOLD acknowledge this signal becomes an
input and the CPU monitors it to detect the beginning of
a DMA cycle and generate the relevant strobe signals.
When a DMA is used, ADS should be pulled up to VCC
through a 10 kΩ resistor.
11 – 16
AR-F151
(4) CPU interface Terminal Pin

I/O Function
Terminal Pin name No.
I/O Function MA/MD7 71
name No.
CS 1 I Chip select for the CPU to access MA/MD6 74
the LC8213 (low sctive). MA/MD5 75
RD 2 I Read.Set to “L” when the CPU is MA/MD4 76
the read out the LC8213 register. MA/MD3 77
WR 3 I Write.Set to “L” when the CPU is MA/MD2 78
to the LC8213 register.
MA/MD1 79
A2 4 I Address input for when the CPU
accesses LC8213. MA/MD0 80
A1 5
AEN 41 O This is set to “L” when the
A0 6
LC8213 is the bus master to the
D7 9 I/O Bidirectional 8-bit data bus image memory.
D6 10 3 state If AEN = “H”, MA/MD, MRD,
D5 11 MWR, IORD, IOWR, UDE and
D4 12 LDE will be a HiZ output.
D3 14 AST 42 O This signal indicates that an
D2 15 address is being output to
D1 16 MA/MD15 ∼ MA/MD0.
D0 17 MDEN 43 O This signal indicates that the
LC8213 is using MA/MD15 ∼
IREQ 20 O Interrupt request signal for the
MD0 as data buses.
CPU. By reading out the INTR
(interrupt request register) the CPU USE 49 I/O Not used.
can find the cause of the 3 state
interruption.IREQ is set to “L” when LDE 48 I/O This signal indicates that the low-
the CPU reads INTR. 3 state order bits of the data bus are
DREQ 21 O DMA request signal for the external being used.
DMA controller. This will be set to MRD 44 O This is set to “L” when data is
“H” in the following cases. 3 state being read out of the image
• Data exists in the EFIFO during memory.
the coding processes. MWR 45 O This is set to “L” when data is
• An empty space exists in the 3 state being written into the image
DFIFO during decoding processes. memory.
• The DBUF can read/write during IORD 46 O Not used.
data transfer between the image 3 state
memory bus and CPU bus. IOWR 47 O Not used.
DACK 22 I DMA acknowledge signal from the 3 state
external DMA comtroller.If DACK is BREQ 37 O This signal is used for the LC8213
set to “L” during coding or to request usage rights from the
decoding, EFIFO and DFIFO will image memory bus.
be accessed. DBUF will be
BACK 38 I Input signal allowing the LC8213
accessed if DACK is set to “L”
to use the image memory bus.
during data transfer between the
image memory bus and CPU bus. IDREQ 39 I Not used.
IDACK 40 O Not used.
(5) Image memory interface READY 50 I This signal is used to delay the
read/write signal when using low
Terminal Pin
I/O Function speed image memory or an I/O
name No.
device.
MA23 54 O Not used.
DTC 51 O Not used.
MA22 55 3 state
MA21 56 (6) Others
MA20 57
Terminal
MA19 56 Pin No. I/O Function
name
MA18 59 CKL 28 I External clock (Max.20NHz)
MA17 60 RESET 27 I Reset
MA16 61 TEST0 35 I For testing.This is normally fixed
MA/MD15 62 I/O Not used. TEST1 34 to “L”.
MA/MD14 64 3 state Low-order 16-bit address and 16- TEST2 33
MA/MD13 65 bit data bus for the image memory.
TEST3 32
MA/MD12 66 TEST4 30
MA/MD11 67 VDD 7, 31, power supply (+ 5V)
MA/MD10 68 73
MA/MD9 69 VSS 13, 29, GND
MA/MD8 70 52, 63,
72
11 – 17
AR-F151
(7) MBCG46533-175 (IC 509) Pin Loyout Pin# Signal Description

Pin# Signal Description 94 AI_*CSCONF Chip select signal for
64KSRAM
1:18 IA14:IA0 Image bus address
19 AI_LINEINT Scanner line interuppt to 95 AI_*WRLED Not used
FX200 INT1 pin 98 F2_*SEL1 Zone select signal from
FX200,
20 CEP_*LED Chip select to image memory
99 F2_*SEL3 Zone select signal from
21 AI_TRIG Tigger signal to LC82103
FX200
22 AI_*IPDACK DMA ack. sugnal to LC82103
100 F2_*DMAK0 DMA ask.signal from FX200
23 IM_*WR Write strobe to image
101 F1_*DBE Data buffer enable signal
memory
from FX164
24 AI_CEP*DREQ DMA request to FX200
102 F1_*DDIN Status signal indicating the
25 AI_BACK Bus ack.signal to LC8213 direction of the data bus
28 IP_CLK1 CLK1 of the LC82103 from FX164
32 AI_*CEPDMAK DMA ack.signal from FX200 103 F1_*RD Read strobe signal from
33 IM_IPDREQ DMA request from LC82103 FX164
34: 42 IDATA7: IDATA0 Image bus data 104 F1_*WR Write strobe signal from
44 IM_IPSH SH signal from LC82103 FX164
45 IM_BREQ Bus request from LC8213 108 F1_CTTL1 System clock from FX164
46 CEP_DREQ DMA request from LC8213 110 F1_*HLDA Hold Ask. signal from FX164
47 CEP_*AEN Address enable signal from 111 F1_ALE Address latch signal from
LC8213 FX164
48 CEP_AST Address strobe signal from 112:129 AD15:AD0 FX164 AD bus
LC8213 132 *XINT 1284 INT signal
49 *RESET Reset signal from LBP 133 XSELECT 1284 SELECT signal
engine 134 XPERR 1284 PERR signal
51 VCKL Not used 135 XBUSY 1284 Busy signal
53 *DREADY DREADY signal from LBP 136 XACK 1284 ACK signal
54 ERROR ERROR signal from LBP 137 XFAULT 1284 FAUL signal
55 *DCRDY DCRDY signal from LBP 138:146 BPCDATA1:BPCDATA8 1284 buffered data
56 *HSYNC Horizontal syc.signal from 148 *XSTROBE 1284 STROBE signal
LBP 149 *XSLECTION 1284 SELECT IN signal
57 *SCLK SCLK signal from LBP 150 *XAUTOFD 1284 AUTOFD signal
58 VSYNC Vertical signal from LBP 151 AI_1284IN 1284 buffer direction control
59 PLL-CLK Basic clock from PLL signal
62 *DDATA Video data to LBP 152 AI_ECPINT 1284 interrupt signal to
63 *DSRDY DSRDY signal from LBP FX200
64 *SDATA SDATA for LBP 153 AI_*DREQ
65 RES-*ERR RESERR to LBP 155 XTST TEST pin
66 *DPAGE DPAGE to LBP 156 SW4M FIFO RAM size select signal
67 *DPRIM DPRIM to LBP 157:174 AI_FIFOD0: WIPS FIFO Data
69 AI-*MWE Write strobe to 16MDRAM AI_FIFOD15
70 AI-*ICAS L-CAS signal to 16MDRAM 175 AI_FIFO*WR WPS FIFO write strobe
71 AI-*UCAS U-CAS signal to 16MDRAM 177 AI_FIFO*CAS WPS FIFO CAS signal
73 *ICAS CAS signal from FX200 178 AI_FIFO*RAS WPS FIFO RAS signal
74 *IWEI Write enable signal for even 179:188 AI_FIFOA0:AI_FIFOA8 WPS FIFO address signal
byte on data bus 190:193 AI_SMPH0:AI_SMPH3 Scanner motor phase signal
75 *IWE0 Write enable signal for odd 194:195 AI_CUR0:AI_CUR1 Scanner motor current
byte on data bus control signal
76 FX1_*RSTO Reset signal from FX164 197 AI_*CLK2 CLK2 signal for CCD
77 AI_*IRD read strobe to I/O device 198 AI_*CLK1 CLK1 signal for CCD
78 AI_*IWR write strobe to I/O device 199 AI_*CLAMP CLAMP signal for CCD
80 AI_*SANWRL Strobe signal for LD0:8 bus 202 AI_*LAMPON Scanner lamp control signal
81:89 LD0:LD7 Buffered AD bus for slow 203 AI_*TGCCD TG signal for CCD
devices access 204 AI_*RSCCD RS signal for CCD
90 AI_*CSIP Chip select signal for 205 PNL_*SCOVER Scanner cover open signal
LC82103 206 *B4SEN B4 sensor signal (Not used
91 AI_*CSCEP Chip select signal for LC8213 in not-Japan model)
92 AI_*RDKRB Read strobe signal for 207 *PISEN Paper in Sensor on Scanner
74LS244 signal
93 AI_*FIFOA9 WPSFIFO address signal 208 *ORSEN Original sensor on scanner
signal
11 – 18
AR-F151
5. FAX PWB circuit description (AR-F151 This IC converts bit map data into coded data in MH, MR, or MMR for-
mat or converts coded data of MH, MR, or MMR format into bit map
only) data. In FAX sending, bit map data is outputted from LZ9FH19 to the
(1) Summary image bus are coded in MMR format and outputted to the CPU bus.
The coded data are stored in the main memory. In FAX reception, the
The FAX PWB performs the following operations:
coded data are read from the main memory and converted into bit map
• Interface with the MCU PWB (Scan data input, print image data out- data by this IC and outputted to the image bus.
put)
The outputted data are sent through the ASIC to the MCU PWB and
• FAX operation panel control
printed. The 256K SRAM connected to the image bus are used as the
• FAX image conversion buffer memory.
• Interface with the public telephone line
(6) ASIC section
NS FX164 is used as the CPU, and FX200 is used as the system con- This ASIC of about 30,000 gates is composed of the three blocks.
troller. An 8M OTPROM is used as the program ROM, and16M DRAM • SCL block: Scanner control and bus control
as the main memory. To store the registered telephone numbers, etc., • 1284 block: Interface section with PC
64K SRAM (backed up by battery) and the clock IC are used. • LBP: Laser printer engine control and FIFO memory control
RESET_GEN forms reset signals in ASIC, and CLOCK GEN forms
LC8213 is used to perform data compression and expansion. clock signals in ASIC. HFKDIV divides the basic video frequency in-
ASIC performs laser printer control and interface with and the MCU putted to the ASIC.
PWB.
The NCU circuit connects with the telephone line.
ASIC
(2) CPU section
The NS32FX164 (having 32bit core and 16bit DSP core) is used as the Reset_gen Clock gen Hfckdiv
CPU in combination with the system controller NS32FX200. The 32bit
CPU core is used to control the system. By combination with the 16bit
DSP core and the Sigma Delta Coded circuit in the NS32FX200, the ECP
MODEM function is realized. The NS32FX200 is provided with the SCL
DRAM controller function, the interrupt controller function, the timer
function, and the DMA controller function, which are used to control the LBP
system.
CPU NS32FX164 System controller NS32FX200

DRAM controller SCL block
Control
Interrupt controller
FX AD BUS
32bit CPU CORE
Timer
16bit DSP module
DMA controller
Sigma Delta Coded Control Address
Scanner control FX data in
Analog NCU Address
Public Telephone line Bus control FX data out
circuit circuit
Motor control Controls
FX
data
out
FX data out
(3) Memory
Control
FX
Lamp modulation data in
A DRAM of 16M (1M × 16 bit composition) is used as the main
memory. An 8M OPTROM (512K × 16 bit composition) is used as the
DMA control LBP READY
program memory.
Sensors LBP
The NJU6355 is used as the clock IC, and 64K SRAM of 8K × 8bit is
Captur
DACK/wrne
DREQ
DACK
on
used as the configuration memory which stores various settings. These
Image memory control
Data tp LBP
two IC’s are backed up by a 3V lithium battery even when the AC
Image address
LC8213 DATA
CAPTURE
power is turned off. The configuration memory is also used as the buff-
Time slot
er memory in PC-FAX.
Image
data on
wrne
Image
TC
CCd timing
(4) Scanner image storing process conrol
Image bus
ASIC (LZ9FH19) receives scanner image data processed in the MCU LC8213 Dreq out
Timing control control
PWB and stores in the scan data memory. ECP Dreq out
LC82103 DMA handshake
ASIC outputs image data to the image data bus and performs com-
Image memory control
Image memory data bus
Image memory address
pression and expansion with LC8213 according to the CPU’s instruc-

CTTL div2 main clock
LC8213 contros
LC8213 BREQ
LC82103 CCD timing
LC8213 BACK
LC8213 Dreq in
tion.
CTTL from FX
ECP Dreq in
(5) Compression, expansion

By combination of LC8213 and 256K SRAM, compression and expan-
sion are performed.
The SCL block performs scanner control, timing control, and bus con-
CPU
trol.
Compression
Bus CPU Image Bus Image Bus The scanner control block does not use the MCU because the MCU
Interface Interface takes an image data.
Expansion The sensor block receives input of the sensor and switch state on the
256K
SRAM ADF. The bus control block performs the CPU bus control, image bus
LC8213
control, and DMA transmission between them. The timing control block
forms CCD clock signals and DMA signals.
11 – 19
AR-F151
The CPU judges whether calling is made from the public line or not
SEL
CLK
ELDATA[5:0]
referring to the frequency of the NCU_RDT signal.
RST
ELDATA[7:0] By turning on RY501, the public line loop is closed. Then response of
RDYLED
ELWR_ MFP is transmitted to the public line. (OFF-hook state). When the dial
ELRD_ pulse is selected, RY501 is turned on/off according to the telephone
RLE number to transmit the remote telephone number to the public
ECP
CS_LBP LBP module PAPPY module telephone line. In the tone pulse, the tone signal from the Sigma Delta
CA[5:0] PA RERR
circuit is passed through the matching transformer to the public
DATA2FPGA[15:0] LEDATA[7:0]
LERDY
telephone line.
IWR_
STALL The NCU_LPCDT signal is generated fromPC814 (ISO503) according
SCL IRD_
to the potential generated in R513. When the external telephone is in
RESERR
STSCH
D_LBP2SCL[15:0]
Module DPRIM OFF-hook state, a potential is generated in R513 to drive the
LBP_WE_
MCU_LPCDT signal LOW. The CPU monitors the signal and judges
IMG2LBP[7:0] VSYNC
whether the external telephone is busy or not.
LBP_RDY DREADY
RESET
ERROR LBP (8) Sigma Delta circuit
DDATA ENCINE
The Sigma Delta circuit converts analog signals passed through the
DPAGE
DSRDY matching transformer into digital signals. The digital signals
PLL DCRDY (FX200_SDOUT) outputted from FX200 are inputted to the analog
SCLK
SDATA switch to generate digital switch for switching with +5V/5V. The signals
PLL_CLK
are converted into analog signals in the LPF circuit.

RAS_
HSYNC_
CAS_
DRAM
WR_
J[3:0] 256K
OE HC4053(IC605)
VCLK ADDR[9:0] x16 HC4053(IC605)
HFKDIV +5V
HS_ DATA[15:0] LF347
Matching
-5V
transformer
FX200_SDOUT LPF LIS
Integrator,Comparator AMP.
FX200_SDIN
LM311 LF347 LF347
Reference voltage
FX200_GAIN FX200_CAL
HC4053(IC516)
+5V
The LBP block controls the laser printer engine and the FIFO memory. -5V
Since sending/receiving of command/status with the LBP engine is FX200_SDFBK
made in the serial line, serial/parallel conversion is made in this block

to make interface between the CPU and the LBP engine. The refer-
ence video signal generated in the PLL circuit is made to the video fre- On the other hand, the analog signals inputted through the matching
quency necessary for the dividing circuit. Video data are sent to the transformer are amplified in the AMP circuit. By combination with
laser engine in synchronization with this signal. FX_200SDBFK signal and the integrator/comparator, the FX_200SDIN
A 16M DRAM (1M × 16 bit) is used as the printer FIFO memory, which signal is made and inputted to FX200.
is used as the buffer memory in PC-scan. (9) Data flow
(7) NCU circuit The data flow in each reception mode is shown below.
The NCU circuit has the following functions:
• Matching between the public line and Sigma Delta circuit (MODEM
(FAX reception) Reception operation
circuit)
• To make OFF-hook state
NCU PSTN
• Ring detection
• External telephone connection LCD PWB FX164 Main Memory
Prog.ROM FX200
• Detection of OFF-hook state of the external telephone Compressed
CPU Bus Image
RY501
LC8213
FAX/PCL
Rublic Matching Sigma Delta Image Bus ASIC MCU PWB
line transformer FAX/PCL LZ9FH19
circuit
MCU PWB
T501 Buf. Mem.
SCAN Image.
NCU_RDT DATA Memory
Ring
To CPU Memory
detection
ISO502
The FAX data from the public line are stored in the 16M DRAM. In this
Loop NCU_LPCDT case, the data are stored in the received format, that is in MH, MR or
R513 current To CPU
detection MMR format. When reception of one page data is completed, printing
External
ISO503 is performed.
telephone
Relay RY501 connects the public line and the matching transformer.
Relay RY501 connects the DC load line and the public line.
When RY501 is open, the external telephone is connected to the public
telephone line. For calling sound from the public line, the signal is rec-
tified and inputted to the photo coupler PC817 ISO502 to generate
NCU_RDT signal.
11 – 20
AR-F151
(FAX reception) Print operation B. CPU pin table

Pin No. Signal name Input/Output
NCU PSTN
1 LED1 Output
Prog.ROM LCD PWB FX164 FX200 Main Memory
2 LED2 Output
Compressed
Image
CPU Bus 3 LCDRS Input/Output
LC8213 4 LCDRW Input/Output
FAX/PCL
Image Bus 5 LCDB4 Input/Output
LZ9FH19
ASIC MCU PWB
FAX/PCL
MCU PWB
Buf. Mem. 6 LCDB5 Input/Output
SCAN Image.
DATA Memory
7 LCDB6 Input/Output
Memory
8 LCDB7 Input/Output
9 OSC1 Input
10 OSC2 Output
The FAX data stored in the main memory are transmitted to LC8213,
where they are converted into bit map data, which are sent to ASIC 11 GND –
and transmitted to the FAX/PCL MCU PWB for printing. 12 KEYCOM1 Output
13 KEYCOM2 Output
(FAX transmission)
14 KEYCOM3 Output
NCU PSTN 15 KEYCOM4 Output
Prog.ROM LCD PWB FX164 FX200 Main Memory 16 VCC –

Compressed
Image
17 TEST Input
CPU Bus
18 /PANEL RESET Input
LC8213
FAX/PCL 19 /SCK Input
Image Bus ASIC MCU PWB
FAX/PCL LZ9FH19
20 SID Input
MCU PWB
Buf. Mem.
SCAN Image. 21 SOD Output
DATA Memory
Memory 22 LCDE Output
23 KEYCOM9 Output
24 KEYCOM8 Output
LZ9FH19 receives image data from FAX/PCL MCU and stores in the 25 LED3 Output
scan data memory. The mage data are transmitted to LC52113 and
converted into MMR format. The converted data are stored in the main 26 KEYCOM7 Output
memory then read by FX200 and transmitted to the public line. 27 KEYCOM6 Output
6. LCD circuit (AR-F151 only) 28 KEYCOM5 Output
A. Outline
The LCD PWB is composed of the 4-bit, single-chip microprocessor,
HD404344, the LCD panel, the key SW block, the LED circuit, and the
shunt regulator circuit. The block diagram is shown below.
The LCD PWB is composed of the key scan process block, the serial
I/O process block, the LED lighting process block, the LCD display
process block, the reset process block, the oscillation circuit, and the
LCD power circuit. These circuits are driven by 5V, and only the LCD
circuit is driven by 12V to generate 5.2V as the LCD display drive volt-
age.
LCD PWB
Key scan section LED circuit section
LCD power circuit

SOD
CPU
FAX board
HD404344
PWB
SCK LCD panel
SIO
RESET
Oscillation
circuit
11 – 21
AR-F151
C. LCD panel pin arrangement

Pin No. Signal name Input/Output Remark
H: Data input;
1 LCDRS Input
L: Instruction input
H: Data read;
2 LCDRW Input
L: Data write
3 LCDE Input Enable signal
4 DB0 Input Not used.
5 DB1 Input Not used
8 LCDB4 Input Data bus line
12 VSS – 0V
13 VDD – +5.2V
14 Vin – +5.2V
15 V5 – LCD drive power
16 GND – Frame GND
D. Key scan input process diagram
Key scan LCD display data Key scan

process process
time (A) process time (B) time (A)
input
Key SW effective period
11 – 22
A B C D E
MCU 1 (CPU SECTION)

AR-F151
5V
R239
4.7KJ
C102 C103 R240

47p 18p
4 5V 5V 1KJ 4
D29
3
DAN202U C283
R249 1000p
7.5KJ (4-D4) DMT1
(4-D4) DMT0 DMT2 (4-D4)
(3-C1) MRMT3 DMT3 (4-D4)
(3-C1) MRMT2 DAL (3-B3)
(3-C1) MRMT1 DAH (3-B4)
2
1
(3-C1) MRMT0 SIN4 (2-E3)
(5-C1) /CS2 SIN3 (2-E3)
SIN2 (2-E3)
(5-A2) D0 (6-C4)
D0 PSW SIN1 (2-E4)
(5-A2) D1
D1
(5-A2) D2
D2 R247
(5-A2) D3 (6-C4)
D3 DRST
(5-A2) D4
D4 1KJ
1
2
(5-A2) D5
D5
(5-A2) D6
D6 RTH (2-D2)
D7 C296 C227 C225
(5-A2) D7
D8 1000p 100p 0.1u
(5-A2) D8
(5-A2) D9
D9
D10 D28
(5-A2) D10
(5-A2) D11 DAP202U
[12] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
D11
3
(5-A2) D12
D12
BR21
D13 C242
(5-A2) D13
D14 0.1u
(5-A2) D14
D15 R203
(5-A2) D15
20KJ
3.3KJ
R206
A5V 68J
1
D106 AN-GND 5V
DA204K
IC9 R272 R271
10KJ 10KJ 5V
H8S/2350
128
127
126
125
124
123
122
121
120
119
118
117
116
115
114
113
112
111
110
109
108
107
106
105
104
103
IC6 IC16
C205 C232 C231
3 A1 21 19 D0 0.1u 5 3
A0 D0 100p SDA VSS4
Vss
Vref
(8-C3) SDA
MD2
MD1
MD0
2
AVss
AVcc
A2 22 A1 D1 18 D1 C233 0.1u 6 SCL A2 3
(8-C3) SCL
A3 23 17 D2 7
P45/AN5
P44/AN4
P43/AN3
P42/AN2
P41/AN1
P40/AN0
A2 D2 0.1u /WC A1 2
PG2/CS2-
PG1/CS3-
BR22
PG0/CAS-
A4 24 A3 D3 16 D3 8 VCC A0 1
20KJ
P47/AN7/DA1
P46/AN6/DA0
A5 25 A4 D4 15 D4 1 PG3/CS1- P53/ADTRG- 102
(1-B2) /CS1
A6 26 A5 D5 14 D5 2 PG4/CS0- P52 101
(1-A2) /CS0 M24C02WBN6
P14/PO12/TIOCA1
P16/PO14/TIOCA2
A7 27 A6 D6 13 D6 3 Vss Vss 100 C357 C356
A8 28 A7 D7 12 D7 4 Vss Vss 99 0.1u 22000p
A9 29 A8 D8 10 D8 5 Vcc P51 98
P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DACK0-
P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DACK1-
(4-D3)
P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA
P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB
P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC
P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD
BR23 RRS
A10 31 A9 D9 9 D9 6 PC0/A0 P50 97
47J PR (4-D3)
A11 32 A10 D10 8 D10 A1 8 1 7 PC1/A1 PF0/BREQ- 96
BR47 SELIN1 (2-C4)
A12 33 A11 D11 7 D11 A2 7 2 8 PC2/A2 PF1/BACK- 95
20KJ SELIN2 (2-C4)
A13 34 A12 D12 6 D12 A3 6 3 9 PC3/A3 PF2/LCAS-/WAIT-/BREQO- 94
SELIN3 (2-C4)
A14 35 5 D13 A4 5 4 10 93 R217 47J
A13 D13 Vss PF3/LWR- /LWR (1-A2,5-A2)
A15 36 4 D14 A1 11 92 R218 47J
A14 D14 A1 (5-B1) PC4/A4 PF4/HWR- /HWR (1-B1)
A16 37 A15 D15 3 D15 A2 A5 8 BR24 1 12 PC5/A5 PF5/RD- 91
A2 (5-B1) NF1 NFM839 BR52 /RD (1-B2,5-A2)
A17 38 A16 A3 A6 7 2 13 PC6/A6 PF6/AS- 90
A3 (5-B1) 20KJ
A18 39 A17 A4 A7 6 3 14 PC7/A7 Vcc 89
A4 (5-B1) BR25 NF2 NFM839
2 CE A5 A8 5 4 15 PB0/A8 PF7/ 88
A5 (5-B1) 47J CPUCLK (5-A1)
20 OE A6 A9 8 1 16 PB1/A9 Vss 87
A6 (5-B1) 47J
5V 1 VPP A7 A10 7 2 17 PB2/A10 H8S/2350 EXTAL 86
A7 (5-B1)
C183 A11 6 3 18 PB3/A11 XTAL 85
A12 5 4 19 Vss Vcc 84
R200 330J
0.1u 20 83 R223
12 – 1
MX27C4096 PB4/A12 STBY- 20KJ
A13 8 BR26 1 21 PB5/A13 NMI 82
A14 7 2 22 PB6/A14 RES- 81 R213 C267
A15 6 3 23 PB7/A15 WDTOVF- 80 20KJ
L20 A16 5 4 24 PA0/A16 P20/PO0/TIOCA3 79
R187 HL (4-D2)
A17 25 PA1/A17 P21/PO1/TIOCB3 78 X1 18p
47J R186 47J /SCANST (5-A1,7-C4)
SBO-02SAN A18 26 PA2/A18 P22/PO2/TIOCC3 77
/CS0 (1-B3) /LWR (1-D3) 47J /SCANSP (5-B1)
27 PA3/A19 P23/PO3/TIOCD3 76
BR48 /PRSTART (5-B1,7-E4)
28 75 C268
BR27 Vss P24/PO4/TIOCA4 20KJ PMCLK (3-A4)
C178 29 PA4/A20/IRQ4- P25/PO5/TIOCB4 74
/RD (1-D3) 20KJ /POFF (7-D4)
C9 47p 30 PA5/A21/IRQ5- P26/PO6/TIOCA5 73
AT-51 19.6608MHz
10u 16V 31 PA6/A22/IRQ6- P27/PO7/TIOCB5 72 18p
(2-B1) (SPPD)
C181 32 PA7/A23/IRQ7- P63/TEND1- 71 BR49
/TMEN
0.1u 33 P67/CS7-/IRQ3- P62/DREQ1- 70 20KJ (5-B1)
(2-B4) (MHPS) BR28 TMCLK
34 P66/CS6-/IRQ2- P61/TEND0-/CS5- 69 (5-B1)
(5-C1) /CPUSYNC 20KJ
35 Vss Vss 68
36 Vss Vss 67
2 37 P65/IRQ1- P60/DREQ0-/CS4- 66 2
(/FCTS) (7-E1)
38 P64/IRQ0- Vss 65 5V
(5-C1) /ASICINT
C255 C254
5V 47p 47p
C208 C279 IC111A
C410 C173 5V P30/TxD0
100p 1
P31/TxD1
R300
P32/RxD0
P33/RxD1
P34/SCK0
P35/SCK1
Vss
Vcc
PD4/D12
PD5/D13
PD6/D14
PD7/D15
PD2/D10
PD3/D11
PE0/D0
PE1/D1
PE2/D2
PE3/D3
PE4/D4
PE5/D5
PE6/D6
PE7/D7
C209 3
PD0/D8
PD1/D9
Vcc
Vss
0.1u 1000p 100p /F-RESET
IC5 L4 2
47p 47J (7-D4)
A15 1 A14 VDD 28 C210 C206 SBO-02SAN C256 C234
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
A13 2 A12 /WE 27 47p 100p 100p 100p 74VHC08

A8 3 26 A14 C211 C207 R137 C224 C389
A7 A13
A7 4 A6 A8 25 A9 C172 47p 100p 1KJ 0.1u C394
A6 5 A5 A9 24 A10 47p 47p
A5 6 A4 A11 23 A12 5V 0.1u C393
A4 7 A3 /OE 22
A3 8 A2 A10 21 A11 0.1u
A2 9 A1 /CE 20
/CS1 (1-B3)
A1 10 A0 I/O8 19 D7 R303 5V
D0 11 I/O1 I/O7 18 D6 20KJ
D1 12 I/O2 I/O6 17 D5
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
D2 13 I/O3 I/O5 16 D4 C171 C11 R215

14 15 D3 5V
BR39
BR38
BR37
BR36
GND I/O4 47p 22u 16V 47J

R202 D26
USB-IN
3
(8-B2) 47J R207 DAN202U

W24257AJ-12
47J
47J
47J
47J
47J R232 R228

5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
10KJ 10KJ
R257 R258
C399 10KJ 10KJ
(FRXD) (7-D1)
100p 5V
(/FRTS) (7-D2)
/HWR (1-D3) (FTXD) (7-E1)
2
1
C409 C201
R224 IC111D
0.1u 1000P (6-C4) KIN1
R201
R208
BR43
5V 12
BR42
BR41
BR40
IC7 1KJ R260

11
/RESET
A15 1 A14 VDD 28 13
R229 47J (5-C1)
20KJ
A13 2 A12 /WE 27 C200

(6-C4) KIN2
A8 3 A7 A13 26 A14 47p C314 C329 C315
1KJ 74VHC08
20KJ
20KJ
1
2
A7 4 25 A9
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
20KJ D7
D8
D9
A6 A8 TMON 100p
D10
20KJ D11
D12
D13
D14
20KJ D15
A6 5 A5 A9 24 A10 0.1u 47p

(4-C1)
A5 6 A4 A11 23 A12
1 A4 7 A3 /OE 22 R214 1
A3 8 A2 A10 21 A11 20KJ C265 C269
A2 9 20 D27 /RST 5V
A1 /CE 1000p 1000p (6-E3)
A1 10 A0 I/O8 19 D15 DAP202U
IC4
3
D8 11 I/O1 I/O7 18 D14 C199 24V 5V

D9 12 I/O2 I/O6 17 D13 47p C10 1 VCC
D10 13 I/O3 I/O5 16 D12 D10 0.82u 2 NC
14 GND I/O4 15 D11 D5 1SS133 3 GND
IC113E IC113F 4
1SS133 CD
R282 5 OUT
W24257AJ-12 (OP-CLK) (4-A3)
R125 R139 11 10 13 12
FW
(6-A4) 33KJ 1KJ
1KJ M51953
C177
(OP-DATA) (4-A3)
R129 C371 22000p
74HC14 74HC14
C198 D6 9.1KJ C139 C372 47p C170
47p 1SS133 0.1u 22000p
1000p
A B C D E
A B C D E
MCU 2 (INPUT SECTION)

5V D21 D22 D33 R181 R180 R182 R183 R284 R279 5V
DAN202U DAN202U DAN202U 10KJ 20KJ 10KJ 10KJ 20KJ 20KJ
3
3
3
R195
R194
R193
R295
150J1/4W 1.5KJ*3 INPUT PORT SELECT CIRCUIT 5V
BR20 IC105
2
1
2
1
2
1
(8-C3) 5 1KJ 4
DVSEL DVS1 (2-E4) 5V IC108A SELIN1O (6-B4) 7 MUX
C252
1 2 R242 11 EN
(1-D3) SELIN1 0 0.1u
6 3 10
MFD (MFD) (2-E4) 47J 9 0
4 (8-C3) C287 C303 C288 G 4
74LS07 4 2 7
100p 0.1u 100p
7 2 (2-B3) (PPD1) 3 0 } 5 R205
TCS (TCS) (2-E4) (2-B1) (POD) 2 1 6 SIN1 (1-C4)
(6-B2)
(2-B4) (MFD) 1 2 10J
8 1 5V IC108B (2-B3) (CED1) 15 3
C248
MMLD (MMLD) (2-E3) 3 4 R234 (2-B4) (TCS) 14 4
(6-A2) 33p
(1-D3) SELIN2 (2-B1) (PMRDY) 13 5
47J (2-B4) DVS1 12 6
C277 C278
MHPS R278 1 2 R283 1KJ 74LS07 SELIN2O (6-B4) 7
(6-D2) 100p 100p
(MHPS) (1-B2)
1KJ 74HC151
CN31 5V
IC113A
1 74HC14 R277 5V IC108C IC103
2 (SDOD) (2-E3) 5 6 R233
3 (1-D3) SELIN3 MUX
1KJ 7 C223
47J EN
C275 C276 11 0.1u
B3B-PH-K-M 74LS07 SELIN3O (6-B4) 0
1
2
1
2
1
2
100p 100p 10
0
SPF DOOR OPEN 9 G
2 7
4
DETECTER CN (2-B3) (PPD2) 0 R185
5
5V
(2-B3) (PPD3)
3
2 1
} 6 SIN2 (1-C4)
(2-D2) THOPEN 2
1 10J
(2-B3) (CED2) 3
A5V 5V 15 C203
(2-E2) DSWS 4
3
3
3
C185 C187 C186 C202 C382 C362 THERMISTER SENSE CIRCUIT R189 14 33p
(2-B4) (MMLD) 5
D19 D20 D32 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p 10KJ 13
12 6
DAP202U DAP202U DAP202U 7
12V
R188
(6-D1) /MEMORY-IN 74HC151
5V
1KJ
R151 R155 R154 R170
C212 IC104
1KF 1MF 7.5KJ 1.2KJ
5V D17 D1 D14 D13 R172 R171 R123 R124 R147 R148 R146 R145 1000p
IC101A MUX
DAN202U DAN202U DAN202U DAN202U 20KJ 20KJ 7.5KJ 7.5KJ 20KJ 20KJ 7.5KJ 7.5KJ 7 C249
NJM2903 EN
8
11 0.1u
D18 0
3
3
3
3
3 10 0
D16 + 1 9 G
FTH (4-D2) 2 7
2 4
(2-B2) (SDSW)
-
1SS133 (2-B1) (SPID)
3 0
1
} 5 R199
SIN3 (1-C4)
2 6
MA700 (2-B1) (SB4D) 2 10J
4
1
3 BR18 (2-B4) (SDOD) 3 3
15 C241
(2-C3) (PSH1) 4
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
5 1KJ 4 R152 R153 C180 14
(6-C1) PPD1 (PPD1) (2-E4) (2-B2) (PSW1) 5 33p
10KF 4.7KJ 0.1u 5V 13
12 6
6 3 7
(6-C1) PPD2 (PPD2) (2-E3)
R143
74HC151
10KJ
7 2
(6-D3) CED1 (CED1) (2-E4)
5V
R142
8 1 (6-E1) /GDI-IN IC102
(6-C2) CED2 (CED2) (2-E3) 1KJ
7 MUX
C152 C151 C222
BR17 11 EN
0.1u 1000p 0 0.1u
5 1KJ 4 10
(6-D2) PPD3 (PPD3) (2-C1) 0
12V 9 G
2 7
A5V 4
(7-E2) (/FREADY) 0
} R184
1
6 3 3 5
(6-D2) PSH2 (PSH2) (2-E3) (7-E1) (/PREADY) 1 SIN4 (1-D4)
1
2 6
(7-C2) (POFD) 1 2 10J
IC109A (7-E3) (/PAGE) 3
7 2 15 C197
(7-C1) PSW1 (PSW1) (2-E3) LM358 (2-B3) (PSH2) 4
8
5V 14
(2-B2) (PSW2) 5 33p
3 R252 R216 13
8 1 RTH-IN + 1 12 6
12 – 2
D105
(6-D2) PSW2 (PSW2) (2-E3) (6-C1) 2 RTH (1-D3) 7
DA204K - 300J 100J
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
5V
74HC151
R301
4
10KJ
C196
22000p D107 C253 5V
DA204K 0.1u R302
2
1
10KJ
3
3
3
3
2
C182 C176 C120 C121 C155 C156 C154 C153

D15 D2 D8 D7 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p C317
D9
DAP202U DAP202U DAP202U DAP202U 0.1u J.P12
1SS133 R136
AN-GND AN-GND
0J JUMPER 4.3KJ1/4W
DSWS (2-E3)
J.P13
2 0J JUMPER 2
R149 C165
D102 1KJ 1000p
A5V 5V DA204K
2
24V1
R2
5V 12V R179
0.22J2W
D35 D31 D38 R296 R297 R263 R270 R298 R285 R178 10KJ (6-A1) 24V1(DSWS) 24V1 (6-A2,6-A4)
DAN202U DAN202U DAN202U 20KJ 20KJ 20KJ 10KJ 20KJ 10KJ 620F IC101B
D4
NJM2903
3
3
3
8
1SS133 R1
5
+ 7 1KJ2W
6 THOPEN (2-E3)
-
P-GND P-GND
4
BR51 R177 C188
2
1
2
1
2
1
5 1KJ 4
(7-B1) SDSW (SDSW) (2-E3) 10KF 22000p
6 3
(7-A1) SPID (SPID) (2-E3)
7 2
(6-C1) POD (POD) (2-E4)
AN-GND
8 1
(6-D4) PMRDY (PMRDY) (2-E4)
BR71
5 1KJ 4
(7-B1) SPPD (SPPD) (1-B2)
5V 5V
6 3
(7-A1) SB4D (SB4D) (2-E3)
1
1 1
7 2 R141
20KJ
1
2
1
2
1
2
8 1
D104 R140
(7-C1) PSH1 (PSH1) (2-E3)
DA204K 1KJ
C150
1000p
3
3
3
D36 D30 D37 C383 C384 C327 C340 C388 C385
DAP202U DAP202U DAP202U 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p 1000p
2
AR-F151
A B C D E
A B C D E
MCU 3 (OUTPUT SECTION 1)

AR-F151
C344 C345
22000p 0.1u 12V
5V
4 4
R269 150J1/4W
IC110A LEDPOD (6-C1)
8
3 NJM3414A
(1-C4) DAH + R169 150J1/4W
5V 1
CCDHI (6-E3) LEDPPD1 (6-D2)
2
-
R266
R156 220J1/4W
2MJ A5V
IC106C LEDPPD2 (6-D1)
4
5 6
(1-D2) PMCLK PMCLK-A (6-D4) R150 150J1/4W
LEDMFD (6-B2)
74LS07
C263
R294 150J1/4W
0.1u AN-GND C15 C379
LEDSPPD (7-B1)
10u 16V 0.1u
C236 C235
R275 150J1/4W
100p 100p LEDMHPS (6-C2)
IC110B
8
5 NJM3414A C358
(1-C4) DAL +
7 0.1u
CCDLO (6-E3)
5V 6
-
R265
IC111C
2MJ
4
9
8
(5-B4) /LD /VIDEO (6-D4)
10
3 3
74VHC08
AN-GND
AN-GND
12V
IC109B
LM358
8
5
+
7
6
-
R274
L15
10KF
12 – 3
4
24V-mir (6-A1,7-B1)
HF50ACC201209
R273 24V
10KF C343
5V 2200p
RY1 RSB-24
24V
AN-GND CP2 L13

6
MRMT-2 (6-A1)
R254 R255 R256 4
ICP-N38 (ROHM)
47KJ 47KJ 750J 8
2 HF50ACC201209 SPMT-2 (7-A1) 2
L14 11
C16 MRMT-0 (6-A1)
13
47u 35V 9
HF50ACC201209 SPMT-0 (7-B1)
C14 1
47u 25V 16
C297 C298 R248
100J
470p 470p
IC12
R4 2 7
TDA VSA
C341 13 TDB VSB 12
1J 2W RY2
2200p 9 RSA RSB-24
P-GND R267 3 1
REFA OUT/A L8
14 REFB OUT A 8 6
2.4KJ MRMT-3 (6-A1)
10 11 4
R236 R268 RSB OUT/B
R235 5 IN/A OUT B 18 8
300J HF50ACC201209 SPMT-3 (7-B1)
C342 6 IN A
620J 2.4KJ L7
2200p 16 IN/B GA 4 11
MRMT-1 (6-A1)
R5 17 IN B GB 15 13
C331 C290 9
(4-D2) /MRPS1 /MRPS2 1J 2W HF50ACC201209 SPMT-1 (7-A1)
C316 C289 1
(4-D2) SLA7027MU
16
(1-C4) MRMT2
C355 C305
(1-C4) MRMT0
C322 C304
(1-C4) MRMT3
(1-C4) MRMT1
1 1
1000pF*8
/SMSEL (4-D3)
A B C D E
A B C D E
MCU 4 (OUTPUT SECTION 2)

IC11
R227 2.2KJ
24V 3 2
(1-C4) DMT0 I1 O1 /DMT0 (7-A2) 24Vdup
4
NC
5
R230 2.2KJ NC
D34 6 7 D23
(1-C4) DMT1 I2 O2 /DMT1 (7-A2)
1SS133 10 MTZJ22B
R226 2.2KJ NC
11 9
(1-C4) DMT2 I3 O3 /DMT2 (7-A2)
12
/SPFS (7-B1) NC
2
5V 13
4 R281 R225 2.2KJ NC 4
3 Q1 14 16
(5-A3) SPFS IC111B (1-C4) DMT3 I4 O4 /DMT3 (7-A2)
2SD1853 15
1.5KJ NC
4
6 1
GND COM
1
5 8
GND COM
74VHC08 TD62064F/AF
P-GND
24V
IC3
1 I1 O1 16
(5-A2) CPFS1 /CPFS1 (6-B2) R134
2 I2 O2 15
(5-A2) CPFS2 /CPFS2 (6-C3)
3 I3 O3 14 47KJ
(5-A2) MPFS /MPFS (6-B2)
4 I4 O4 13
E1
(1-D3) RRS /RRS (6-B3) R135

5 I5 O5 12 /VFM B1 Q103
(5-A2) VFM 6 I6 O6 11 2SA1036K
(5-A2) VFMCNT /VFMCNT (6-B3) 4.7KJ1/4W
5V 7 I7 O7 10
(1-D3) PR /PR (6-B4) VFMOUT (6-B3)
8 GND CM 9
C1
24V
5V
TD62003
9 8
(1-D1) (OP-CLK) OP-CLK (6-C4)
IC108D 3 4 IC13
74LS07 R261 2.2KJ
3 I1 O1 2
(5-A3) SMSEL /SMSEL (3-E1)
4 NC
3 IC113B 3
5 NC
74HC14 R262 2.2KJ
6 I2 O2 7
(5-A3) SPUS /SPUS (7-B1)
10 NC
R250 2.2KJ
9 8 11 I3 O3 9
IC108E (5-A3) SGS /SGS (7-B1)
12 NC
11 10 13 NC
(1-D1) (OP-DATA) OP-DATA (6-C4) IC113D R251 2.2KJ
14 I4 O4 16
74HC14 (5-A3) SRRC /SRRC (7-B1)
15 NC
74LS07
GND COM 1
8 24V
GND COM
TD62064AF
12 – 4
IC2
1 I1 O1 16
(5-A2) MC /MC (6-A4)
2 I2 O2 15
(5-A2) BIAS /BIAS (6-A4)
3 I3 O3 14
(5-A2) BIASL /BIASL (6-B4)
4 I4 O4 13
(5-A2) BIASH /BIASH (6-B4)
5 I5 O5 12 5V
(5-A3) TC /TC (6-B4)
6 I6 O6 11
(5-A2) GRIDL /GRIDL (6-A4)
1
7 I7 O7 10
(5-A2) CL /CL (6-B3)
8 GND CM 9 Q104
TD62003 DTA143XKA
2 2
2
IC8
D3 1 16
1SS133 (5-A2) MM I1 O1 /MM (6-A2)
2 I2 O2 15
(5-A3) MRPS1 /MRPS1 (3-B1)
3
3 I3 O3 14
(5-A3) MRPS2 /MRPS2 (3-B1)
24V 4 I4 O4 13 R192
Q102 (5-A2) PMD /PMD (6-D4)
5 I5 O5 12 120J1/4W
2SA1036K (5-A2) LDEN /LDEN (6-D4)
6 I6 O6 11 /HL
(1-D2) HL
C1 E1 7 I7 O7 10 /FTH
(2-D3) FTH HLOUT (6-A4)
8 G NC 9
R103
TD62503F
C4 C115 + C7
B1
47KJ
+ R122 10u 35V
2200p 4.7KJ1/4W
0.47u 50V
5V R104
4.7KJ
C128 IC1 3
22000p
2 VDD VCC1 6
D12
9 IN1 8 Q101 2
(5-A2) TM VCC2 TMON (1-C1)
DTC114EKA
1 1 IN2 OUT1 7 1
(5-A2) TM- TMa-O (6-A3) 1SS133
5 VSS OUT2 3
TMb-O (6-A3)
R126 R133
TA7291S
1
47KJ 47KJ
AR-F151
A B C D E
A B C D E
MCU 5 (ASIC SECTION)

5V
AR-F151
L12 C406 C336 C407 C339
SAD9
SAD8
SAD7
SAD6
SAD5
SAD4
SAD3
SAD2
SAD1
SAD0
SAD13
SAD12
SAD11
SAD10
(6-E4)
(6-E4)
(6-E4)
(6-E4)
(6-E4)
(6-E4)
(6-E4)
(6-E4)
(6-D4)
SBO-02SAN X3 0.1u
0.1u 0.1u 0.1u C326
<1330> 22.000MHz /LD IC15 IC14
(5-E4)
(5-E4)
(5-E4)
(5-D4)
(5-D4)
(5-D4)
47J (3-A3) 18p
8 5 R253 1 28 1 28
Vcc OUT A14 VDD A14 VDD
SAD12 2 27 SAD12 2 27
/SYNC
A12 /WE A12 /WE
CCDD7
CCDD6
CCDD5
CCDD4
CCDD3
CCDD2
CCDD1
CCDD0
BR75 SAD7 3 26 SAD13 SWE[0] (5-C4) SAD7 3 26 SAD13 SWE[1] (5-C4)
10J A7 A13 A7 A13
GND
5 4 SAD6 4 25 SAD8 C334 SAD6 4 25 SAD8
SCS[0]
SCS[1]
SOE[0]
SOE[1]
A6 A8 A6 A8
SWE[0]
SWE[1]
C319 C320 C299 6 3 SAD5 5 A5 A9 24 SAD9 SAD5 5 A5 A9 24 SAD9
18p
4
7 2 SAD4 6 A4 A11 23 SAD11 SAD4 6 A4 A11 23 SAD11
4 0.1u 22000p 4
8 1 SAD3 7 A3 /OE 22 SAD3 7 A3 /OE 22
12p SOE[0] (5-C4) SOE[1] (5-C4)
5 4 SAD2 8 A2 A10 21 SAD10 SAD2 8 A2 A10 21 SAD10
6 3 SAD1 9 20 SAD1 9 20
(8-A2)
(8-A2)
(8-B2)
(8-B2)
(8-C2)
(8-C3)
(8-C3)
A1 /CE A1 /CE
7 2 SAD0 10 A0 I/O8 19 SD07 SAD0 10 A0 I/O8 19 SD17
8 1 SD00 11 I/O1 I/O7 18 SD06 SD10 11 I/O1 I/O7 18 SD16
SCS[0] (5-C4) SCS[1] (5-C4)
SD01 12 17 SD05 SD11 12 17 SD15
/SH
/f2
I/O2 I/O6 I/O2 I/O6
/f1
BCLK
BR74
CP
RS
SP
SD02 13 16 SD04 SD12 13 16 SD14
SD07
SD06
SD05
SD04
SD03
SD02
SD01
SD00
SD17
SD16
SD15
SD14
SD13
SD12
SD11
SD10
10J I/O3 I/O5 I/O3 I/O5
5V
R241
14 GND I/O4 15 SD03 C332 14 GND I/O4 15 SD13 C325
C369 C367 C348 C346 R243 BR70 BR72 BR73 BR68 BR62 BR63
2KJ 18p 18p
20KJ 20KJ 20KJ 20KJ 20KJ 20KJ W24257AJ-12 W24257AJ-12
33p 33p 33p 33p
C333 C324
C370 C368 C349 C347 C335 C337
/USB-EN 18p 18p
(8-B2) 0.1u 0.1u
20KJ
33p 33p 33p 33p C280
47p
8
7
6
5
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
3
4
5V
R245
R246
BR55 BR64 BR56 BR69 BR57 BR65 BR58 BR66 BR59 BR67 BR60 BR61 BR54 C408
R244
10J 10J 30J 30J 47J 47J 47J 47J 47J 47J 47J 47J 47J 5V
0.1u
IC113C
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
7
6
5
47J
47J
6 5 L11
10J
USB-ON
C295 SBO-02SAN
/SDCLK
(8-B2)
X2
100p <1329> 13.9867MHz 5V
74HC14 8 Vcc OUT 5
R231 10J
C284
GND
C282 C286
0.1u 0.1u C270 C285 C301 C302 C274 L6
4
0.1u 0.1u C259 0.1u 22000p SBO-02SAN

/1284-EN
0.1u C250 33p
(8-B2)
BR53 0.1u C264
5V C292 0.1u C271 IC107
20KJ C281 C243 0.1u 1 9
192
191
190
189
188
187
186
185
184
183
182
181
180
179
178
177
176
175
174
173
172
171
170
169
168
167
166
165
164
163
162
161
160
159
158
157
156
155
154
153
152
151
150
149
148
147
146
145
144
143
142
141
140
139
138
137
136
135
134
133
132
131
130
129
CLK IN CNTCK 47J
100p 0.1u 2 11 R222
100p TEST1 CKO
IC106A 0.1u 3 4
TEST2 PULSE
BR53 15 TEST3 C261
192
191
190
189
188
187
186
185
184
183
182
181
180
179
178
177
176
175
174
173
172
171
170
169
168
167
166
165
164
163
162
161
160
159
158
157
156
155
154
153
152
151
150
149
148
147
146
145
144
143
142
141
140
139
138
137
136
135
134
133
132
131
130
129
3 2 1 193 128 6 3
20KJ 193 128 -CKO/2
(6-D4) S/H 194 194 127 127 13 TR CKO/2 7
12p
195 195 126 126 -CKO 10
196 196 125 125 5 GND
74LS07 197 124 8 12
197 124 GND Vcc
198 198 123 123 14 GND Vcc 16
199 122 R221 10J
20KJ 199 122 20KJ SLCT
5V R237 200 121 R220 (8-B2)
200 121 M66236FP
C291 201 201 120 120 C273 C272
(4-D3) SGS /FAULT
202 202 119 119 (8-B2)
100p (4-D3) SRRC PE 0.1u 47p
IC106B 203 118 BR50 BR34 (8-B2)
(4-D3) SPUS 203 118 20KJ 10J BUSY
204 204 117 117 (8-B2)
(7-E4) /READY R238 20KJ /ACK
4 3 205 205 116 116 (8-B2)
(6-C3) OP-LATCH /STB
206 206 115 115 (8-B2)
(4-D2) MRPS2 BR46 BR32 /AUTOFD
R219 207 207 114 114 (8-B2)
(4-D2) MRPS1 20KJ 10J /SLCTIN VCK
208 208 113 113 (8-B2)
74LS07 10KJ (4-A4) SPFS INIT
209 209 112 112 (8-B2)
(4-D3) SMSEL R209 20KJ /REV
210 210 111 111 (8-B2)
211 110 R210 10J
(4-D2) TC 211 110
212 212 109 109 (8-B2)
(4-D2) GRIDL PARAAD7
213 213 108 108 (8-B2)
214 107 BR45 BR16 PARAAD6
214 107 (8-B2)
(4-D2) MC 20KJ 10J PARAAD5
215 215 106 106 (8-B2)
(4-D2) BIASL PARAAD4
216 105
12 – 5
216 105 (8-B2)
(4-D2) BIASH PARAAD3
217 217 104 104 (8-B2)
(4-D2) BIAS BR35 BR14 PARAAD2
218 218 103 103 (8-B2)
(4-D2) CL 20KJ 10J PARAAD1
219 219 102 102 (8-B2)
(4-D3) VFMCNT PARAAD0
220 220 101 101
(4-D3) VFM 221 221 100 100
(4-D2) LDEN 222 222 99 99
(4-D2) PMD VHIHG73C025FD
223 223 98 98
224 224 97 97 C244 C245 C246 C247
(4-D2) MM BR44
225 225 96 96
(4-D3) MPFS 20KJ 100p
226 226 95 95
/FAXCS (7-C3) 100p 100p 100p
227 227 94 94
(4-D3) CPFS2 R211 10J BR31 /FAXACK (7-D3)
228 228 93 93 BR33
(4-D3) CPFS1 10J
229 229 92 92 20KJ
(4-A1) TM /FAXPRD (7-D3)
230 230 91 91 C260
(4-A1) TM- 231 231 90 90
(1-A3) D15 /FAXREQ (7-C3)
232 232 89 89 0.1u
(1-A3) D14 /PCLREQ (7-C3)
2 233 233 88 88 2
(1-A3) D13 234 234 87 87
(1-A3) D12 R190 20KJ /PCLCS (7-D3)
235 235 86 86
(1-A3) D11 R212 10J BR15 /PCLACK (7-D3)
236 236 85 85
237 84 BR19 10J
(1-A3) D10 237 84 20KJ /PCLPRD (7-D3)
238 83 R204 10J
(1-A3) D9 238 83 /HSYNC (7-D4)
239 82 R176 10J
239 82 OUTD15 (7-D3)
240 81 R175 10J
(1-A3) D8 240 81 OUTD14 (7-D3)
241 80 R174 10J BR8
(1-A3) D7 241 80 20KJ OUTD13 (7-D3)
242 79 R173 10J
(1-A3) D6 242 79 OUTD12 (7-D3)
243 78 R168 10J
(1-A4) D5 243 78 OUTD11 (7-D3)
244 77 R167 10J
(1-A4) D4 244 77 OUTD10 (7-D3)
245 76 R166 10J BR3
(1-A4) D3 245 76 20KJ OUTD9 (7-D3)
246 75 R165 10J
(1-A4) D2 246 75 OUTD8 (7-D3)
247 74 R164 10J
(1-A4) D1 247 74 OUTD7 (7-C4)
248 73 R163 10J
(1-A4) D0 248 73 OUTD6
249 249 72 72
250 71 R162 10J
(1-D3) /LWR 250 71 OUTD5 (7-C4)
251 70 R161 10J
(1-D3) /RD 251 70 OUTD4 (7-D4)
252 69 BR2
252 69 20KJ
253 68 R160 10J
(1-D3) CPUCLK 253 68 OUTD3 (7-C4)
254 67 R159 10J
254 67 OUTD2 (7-D4)
255 66 R158 10J
255 66 OUTD1 (7-C4)
256 65 R157 10J
(1-D2) /SCANST 256 65 OUTD0 (7-D4)
C396
C395 BR1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
20KJ
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
C237 C239 C238 C257 0.1u

5V C228 0.1u C221 C219 C192 C190
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
33p 47p 47p 0.1u

C398 0.1u 18p 18p 18p 18p
3.3V C220 C218 C191 C189
C258 0.1u
L9 C229 18p 18p 18p 18p
SBO-02SAN 0.1u
0.1u
L5
SBO-02SAN
BR29 BR30
47J 47J
C397
1 1
0.1u This Section is 3.3V PULL UP
R196
R197
R191
Other Section is 5V PULL UP
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
C12 C13
/TMEN
1KJ
1KJ
TMCLK
/SCANSP
/PRSTART
20KJ
10u 16V 10u 16V

BR7 BR6 BR5 BR4 BR9 BR10 BR11 BR12 BR13
20KJ 20KJ 20KJ 20KJ 20KJ 20KJ 20KJ 20KJ 20KJ
C179
/CS2
(1-A2)
(1-A2)
(1-A3)
(1-A3)
(1-A3)
(1-A3)
(1-A3)
(1-D2)
(1-D2)
(1-D2)
(1-D2)
100p C217
100p
/ASICINT
R198
/OE
(1-C4)
/WE
20KJ
MAD0
MAD1
MAD2
MAD3
MAD4
MAD5
MAD6
MAD7
MAD8
MAD9
/RAS0
/RAS1
/RAS2
/CAS0
/CAS1
/CPUSYNC (1-B2)
(1-B2)
MAD10
MAD11
MDATA9
MDATA8
MDATA7
MDATA6
MDATA5
MDATA4
MDATA3
MDATA2
MDATA1
MDATA0
MDATA15
MDATA14
MDATA13
MDATA12
MDATA11
MDATA10
C240 100p
(6-E1)
(6-E1)
(6-E1)
(6-D2)
(6-D2)
(6-D2)
(6-D2)
(6-D2)
(6-E2)
(6-E2)
(6-E2)
(6-E2)
(6-E2)
(6-E1)
(6-E1)
(6-E1)
(6-E1)
(6-E1)
(6-E1)
(6-E1)
(6-E1)
(6-E1)
/RESET
(6-D1)
(6-D1)
(6-D1)
(6-D1)
(6-D1)
(6-D1)
(6-D1)
(6-D1)
(6-D1)
(6-D1)
(6-D1)
(6-D1)
(6-D1)
(1-E1)
A B C D E
A B C D E
MCU 6 (CONNECTOR SECTION/POWER SECTION)

24V 5V OPE PANEL CN
24V1 CN20
C308 LSU UNIT CN
(2-E2)
1
ELKT 1000p (1-B4) DRST 2
L16
3 CN23
3
(1-B4) PSW 4
D25
(1-D1) KIN2 5 1 2 5V1(DSWS) (6-A1)
D24 1SS133 (1-D1) KIN1 6 R276 3 4
4 DAN202U (4-A3) OP-CLK 7 /VIDEO 5 6 S/H (6-A3) 4
(6-A3) OP-LATCH 8 (3-A3) 100J 7 8 /LDEN (4-D2)
C1 CN3
(4-A3) OP-DATA 9 9 10 /SYNC (5-B4)
C116 22u 35V 1 2 (2-D4) SELIN1O 10 11 12
2
1
0.1u 50V D-GND
3 4 (2-D4) SELIN2O 11 13 14 PMCLK-A (3-A4)
5 6 12 (2-A1) PMRDY 15 16 /PMD (4-D2)
7 8 13 17 18
(4-D2)
/BIAS 9 10 /BIASL 14
P-GND (4-D2) (4-D2) 24V
/MC 11 12 /BIASH 15 B18B-PHDSS-B
12V (4-D2) (4-D2) D-GND
/GRIDL 13 14 /TC SELIN3O 16
(1-B1) (4-D2)
FW 15 16 /PR 3.3V (2-D4) 17
(4-E2) SBO-02SAN (4-D3) P-GND
HLOUT 17 18 18
19 20
L18 ELKT D11
21 22 18FE-BT-VK-N
ELKT L19 1N4005
23 24
C107 L17
25 26 5V
0.1u 27 28
D-GND
B28B-PHDSS-B
C133 C149 C8
C6 CED1 CN
0.1u 0.1u 100u 16V CN29
POWER PWB CN 22u 16V
CN1
D-GND
1
(2-A3) CHECKER CN
CED1 1 (1-E1) /RST 2
2 (1-E3) SDA 3
3 (1-E3) SCL 4
CL UNIT CN
3 5 3
CN25 B3B-PH-K-K 6
D-GND
TM CN VFM UNIT CN
1 B6B-PH-K-R
CN9 L10 CN21 2
(4-B1) (4-D2) /CL 3
TMa-O 1 (4-E3) VFMOUT 1 4
HF50ACC201209 CSS2 CN
TMb-O 2 2 24V
(4-B1) (4-D3) /VFMCNT 3 04FE-BT-VK-N CN6
P-GND 24V 5V
B2P-VH 4
5 (4-D3) /CPFS2 1 2
3 4
B5B-PH-K-S 5 6
(2-A3) PPD3 7 8
P-GND
(2-A3) PSH2 9 10
(2-A3) PSW2 11 12
C129
13 14
12 – 6
(2-A3) CED2
1000p
B14B-PHDSS-B
MAIN MOTOR CN C138 C147 C130
C148
1000p 1000p 0.1u
1000p
CPFS1 CN P-GND
CN18
D-GND
24V CN7
(2-E2) 24V1 1
MHPS UNIT CN
2 1 CN27
3 /CPFS1 2
2 4 (4-D4) 3 (3-E3) LEDMHPS 1 2
(4-D2) /MM 5 (2-A4) MHPS 2
(2-A4) MMLD 6 B3B-PH-K-S 3
C145
7
8 1000p B3B-PH-K-S
MANUAL FEED CN
C193 D-GND
08FE-BT-VK-N CN12
1000p 24V C374 C363
P-GND 1000p 1000p
1
RRS CN
CN11 (4-D3) /MPFS 2
24V
(3-E3) LEDMFD 3
D-GND
1 (2-A4) MFD 4
PPD1 CN
/RRS 2 5 CN14
(4-D3) 3
4 B5B-PH-K-R (3-E4) LEDPPD1 1
D-GND
(2-A3) PPD1 2
MIRROR MOTOR CN C162
B4B-PH-K-S 3
1000p
CN28 B3B-PH-K-R
D-GND
(3-E2) 24V-mir 1
(3-E1) MRMT-3 2
(3-E2) MRMT-2 3
(3-E1) MRMT-1 4
(3-E2) MRMT-0 5
DSW UNIT CN
PPD2 CN
52147-0510 24V CN4
CN13
1
1 1
(2-D1) 24V1(DSWS) 2 (3-E4) LEDPPD2 1
5V
(6-D4) 5V1(DSWS) 3 (2-A3) PPD2 2
POD UNIT CN
4 3
CN22 (2-C2) RTH-IN 4
B4P-VH 5
R101
(3-E4) LEDPOD 1
C127 C101 R102 240J1/4W (2-A1) POD 2 B5B-PH-K-M
0.1u 0.1u 240J1/4W AN-GND
3
C166
C164 22000p
B3B-PH-K-S
0.1u
D-GND
AR-F151
D-GND D-GND
A B C D E
A B C D E
MCU 7 (CONNECTOR SECTION 2)

PCL/FAX CN
AR-F151
CN5
1 31
R128 10J 2 32 R130 10J
/SCLINE /PRLINE
(1-D4) /SCANST 3 33 /PRSTART (1-D2)
C141 /FPAGE
4 34 /PAGE (7-E2)
4 18p /PREADY /FREADY 4
(7-E1) /PREADY 5 35 /FREADY (7-E2) R131 10J
FTXD /READY
(7-E1) FTXD 6 36 /READY (5-A3)
/FRTS FRXD
(7-E2) /FRTS 7 37 FRXD (7-E1)
/FCTS
8 38 /FCTS (7-D1)
C140 C142
9 39
10 40
11 41 18p 18p
F-RESET
(1-E1) /F-RESET 12 42 R132 10J
/HSYNC /POFF
(5-E2) /HSYNC 13 43 /POFF (1-C1)
OUTD1 OUTD0
(5-E1) OUTD1 14 44 OUTD0 (5-E1)
OUTD3 OUTD2
(5-E1) OUTD3 15 45 OUTD2 (5-E1)
OUTD5 OUTD4 C143
(5-E2) OUTD5 16 46 OUTD4 (5-E2)
OUTD7 OUTD6
(5-E2) OUTD7 17 47 OUTD6 (5-E2)
OUTD9 OUTD8 18p
(5-E2) OUTD9 18 48 OUTD8 (5-E2)
OUTD11 OUTD10 C134 C135 C137
(5-E2) OUTD11 19 49 OUTD10 (5-E2)
OUTD13 OUTD12
(5-E2) OUTD13 20 50 OUTD12 (5-E2)
OUTD15 OUTD14 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u
(5-E2) OUTD15 21 51 OUTD14 (5-E2)
/PCLREQ /PCLPRD
(5-E2) /PCLREQ 22 52 /PCLPRD (5-E2)
/PCLCS /PCLACK 12V
(5-E2) /PCLCS 23 53 /PCLACK (5-E2)
/FAXREQ /FAXPRD 5V
(5-E2) /FAXREQ 24 54 /FAXPRD (5-E2)
/FAXCS /FAXACK 3.3V
(5-E2) /FAXCS 25 55 /FAXACK (5-E2) L2 SBO-02SAN
26 56
27 57 L3 SBO-02SAN
28 58
29 59 L1 SBO-02SAN
30 60
TX25-60P-23ST-H1
3 3
C118 C3 C119 C5 C117 C2
0.1u 47u 25V 0.1u 47u 16V 0.1u 47u 16V
5V
R113
20KJ
12 – 7
5V R106
10J
(7-C4,7-D4) /PAGE (/PAGE)
C108
24Vdup (2-E2)
18p
R264
CP1 CN19
ICP-N38 (ROHM) 20KJ
R259
24V1 1KJ
1
(4-D4) /DMT0 (2-E2) (POFD)
2
(4-D4) /DMT1 3 5V 5V
(4-D4) /DMT2 4
2 (4-D4) /DMT3 2
5
R119 R114
B05B-XASK-1
20KJ 20KJ
R112 R107
10J 10J
(1-D1) (/FRTS) /FRTS /FREADY (/FREADY)
C114 C109
(7-C4) (7-E4) (2-E3)
18p 18p
SPF UNIT CN
CN26
5V 5V
SPPD (2-A1)
1 2 5V
LEDSPPD (3-E3)
3 4
(2-A1) SPID SDSW (2-A2)
24V 5 6 R117 R115
(2-A1) SB4D
D-GND 7 8 20KJ 20KJ
9 10 R110 R108
/SPUS (4-D3) 10J 10J
11 12
/SPFS (4-A4) (1-D1) (FRXD) FRXD /PREADY (/PREADY)
13 14
/SRRC (4-D3) CN10
15 16 C112 C110
/SGS (4-D3) (7-E4) (7-C4) (2-E2)
17 18 18p 18p
(3-E1) SPMT-1 SPMT-3 (3-E1) 1
19 20
(3-E2) SPMT-2 SPMT-0 (3-E2) (2-A2) PSW1 2
21 22
24V-mir (3-E2) 3
23 24
B24B-PHDSS-B B3B-PH-K-M
1 5V 5V 1
R118 R116
20KJ 20KJ
R111 R109
10J 10J
(7-D4) /FCTS (/FCTS) (FTXD) FTXD
C113 C111
(1-D2) (1-D1) (7-C4)
18p 18p
A B C D E
A B C D E
MCU 8 (CONNECTOR SECTION 3)
CN30
CCD PWB CN 1 1
4 2 2 4
3 3
(5-B4) CCDD7 4 4
(5-B4) CCDD6 5 5
(5-B4) CCDD5 6 6
(5-B4) CCDD4 7 7
(5-B4) CCDD3 8 8
(5-C4) CCDD2 9 9
(5-C4) CCDD1 10 10
(5-C4) CCDD0 11 11
(5-C4) 12 12
BCLK
13 13
(5-C4) 14 14
CP
15 15 5V
(5-C4) 16 16 DV UNIT CN
SP
17 17
(5-C4) 18 18
RS
19 19
(5-C4) 20 20 D109
/SH
21 21 DA204K D110
(5-C4) 22 22 DA204K
/f2
1
23 23
1
12V (5-C4) 24 24 5V
/f1 24V CN17 24V
5V 25 25 CN17
A5V 26 26 1 R304
1 2 300J
27 27 (2-A4) 3 (1-E3)
(2-A4) TCS 2 TCS 4 SDA
28 28 (2-A4) 5
(2-A4) DVSEL 3 DVSEL 6 SCL
29 29 7 (1-E3)
(3-C3) CCDLO 4 8
30 30 9 R305 300J
(3-C4) CCDHI 10
31 31 B4B-PH-K-R
32 32 B10-PHDSS-B
2
2
FF4-32-S15D3
C377 C378 D-GND D-GND
0.1u 0.1u
C18 C19 R286 C364
10u 25V 10u 25V 5.1KJ 0.1u
AN-GND
C376 C365 C366 C386 C17
3 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u 47u 16V 3
GDI/USB CN
5V
CN15
1 GDI MEMORY CN 3.3V
2
3
(5-D2) PARAAD0 4 CN16
(5-D2) PARAAD1 5
(5-D2) PARAAD2 6 1 21
(5-D2) PARAAD3 7 (5-C1) MDATA0 2 22 MAD0 (5-C1)
12 – 8
(5-D3) /REV 12 (5-C1) MDATA5 7 27 MAD5 (5-C1)
(5-D3) INIT 13 (5-C1) MDATA6 8 28 MAD6 (5-C1)
(5-D3) /SLCTIN 14 (5-C1) MDATA7 9 29 MAD7 (5-C1)
(5-D3) /AUTOFD 15 (5-C1) MDATA8 10 30 MAD8 (5-C1)
(5-D3) /STB 16 (5-C1) MDATA9 11 31 MAD9 (5-C1)
(5-D3) /ACK 17 (5-C1) MDATA10 12 32 MAD10 (5-C1)
(5-D3) BUSY 18 (5-C1) MDATA11 13 33 MAD11 (5-C1)
(5-D3) PE 19 (5-C1) MDATA12 14 34 /CAS0 (5-C1)
(5-D3) /FAULT 20 (5-C1) MDATA13 15 35 /CAS1 (5-C1)
(5-D3) SLCT 21 (5-C1) MDATA14 16 36 /RAS0 (5-C1)
(2-D3) /GDI-IN 22 (5-C1) MDATA15 17 37 /RAS1 (5-C1)
23 (5-D1) /OE 18 38 /RAS2 (5-C1)
24 (5-D1) /WE 19 39 /MEMORY-IN (2-D3)
25 20 40
26
(5-A3) 27
USB-IN 52340-0401
(1-B1) 28
2 /USB-EN 2
3.3V (5-A3) 29
USB-ON
(5-A3) 30
/1284-EN
31
31FT-BT-VK-N
1 1
AR-F151
A B C D E
AR-F151
12 – 9
AR-F151
12 – 10
AR-F151
12 – 11
AR-F151
12 – 12
AR-F151
12 – 13
AR-F151
12 – 14
AR-F151
12 – 15
AR-F151
12 – 16
AR-F151
12 – 17
AR-F151
12 – 18
A B C D E
FAX LCD PWB (AR-F151 Only)

5V
AR-F151
R701 R702 R703 R704 R705 R706

S739 S740 S741 S742 S743 S744 S745 S746 S747
4 4
20kJ 20KJ 20KJ 20KJ 20KJ 20KJ
KEYSEN1
KEYSEN2 S705 S709 S713 S719 S723 S727 S731 S735
KEYSEN3
KEYSEN4
KEYSEN5
KEYSEN6
S706 S710 S714 S720 S724 S728 S732 S736
5V
S707 S711 S715 S717 S721 S725 S729 S733 S737
S708 S712 S716 S718 S722 S726 S730 S734 S738

R707 R708 R709 R710 R711 R712 R713 R714 R715
20KJ 20KJ 20KJ 20KJ 20KJ 20KJ 20KJ 20KJ 20KJ

S701 S702 S703 S704
3 3
KEYCOM1 R716 1KJ

KEYCOM2 R717 1KJ
KEYCOM3 R718 1KJ
KEYCOM4 R719 1KJ
KEYCOM5 R720 1KJ
KEYCOM6 R721 1KJ
KEYCOM7 R722 1KJ
KEYCOM8 R723 1KJ
KEYCOM9 R724 1KJ
5V
D701 D702 D703
12 – 19
R745 R746 R747
5.2V 390J 390J 390J

R731
CN701-1 A12V 510J 0.5W
LED1 LED2 LED3
5V
2 R732 C702 IC701 2
3
2.7kF 22U/16V LED1 1 R10 D5 28 KEYCOM5
+ LED2 2 R11 D4 27 KEYCOM6 5.2V 5V
1 KEYSEN1 R725 1KJ LCDRS 3 R12 D3 26 KEYCOM7
KEYSEN2 R726 1KJ LCDRW 4 R13 D2 25 LED3
R733 C701 KEYSEN3 R727 1KJ LCDB4 5 24 KEYCOM8
2
R20 D1
2.4kF 0.1u KEYSEN4 R728 1KJ LCDB5 6 R21 D0 23 KEYCOM9
KEYSEN5 R729 1KJ LCDB6 7 R22 R03 22 LCDE R749
KEYSEN6 R730 10KJ LCDB7 8 R23 SO 21 S0D 20KJ
IC703 9 OSC1 SI 20 SID
NJM431U 5V 10 OSC2 /SCK 19 SCK IC702
D704 D705 11 GND /RESET 18 /PANEL RESET
DAN202U DAN202U KEYCOM1 12 R30 TEST 17 LCDRS 1 RS
KEYCOM2 13 R31 VCC 16 LCDRW 2 R/W
KEYCOM3 14 R32 R33 15 KEYCOM4 LCDE 3 E
R734 R735 R736 4 DB0
HD404344 5 DB1
20KJ 20KJ 20KJ R754 6 DB2
C716 Q701 7 DB3
N,M R739 1MJ C711 LCDB4 8 DB4
0.1u R748 LCDB5 9 DB5
20KJ LCDB6 10 DB6
CN701-2 VCC DTA143EKA Y701 0.1u LCDB7 11 DB7
CN701-3 SOD R740 1KJ C712 VR701 12 VSS
1
CN701-4 SID R741 1KJ 0.1u 10KJ 13 VDD

CN701-5 SCK R742 1KJ 4.00MHz 14
2 VIN
CN701-6 /PANEL RESET 15 VS
CN701-7 D-GND C709 C710 16 GND
CN701-8 D-GND 30P N,M R750
N,M
1 R752 100J 1
C703 R751 C708 2KJ C-LCD
3
J746 + N,M
Jumper N,M
21
CN701-9 22U/16V
C717
F-GND R755 C713 0.1u
N,M N,M C719 C714 C715 C704
N,M 0.1u 0.1u 0.1u D706 D707 C705 C706 C707 R737 C718
DAP202U DAP202U 470pF 470pF 470pF 20KJ 0.1u
A B C D E
A B C D E
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM (LOW VOLTAGE BLOCK)
TM541 D5
SW1-1 BCR5PM-10 R5 R6 T1
F1 F3 D1 C8 1SS270A
AC-P07 SDDJE-3 C5 CR6PM-10 Z0651
4 15A/125V 5A/125V 104K/AC250V(X) 101-271J 330-271J(Fuse) 4
224K/AC250V(X) SCR1 (Option) D103
1N4005 222K/AC250V(Y) TF541 1
L YG902C2R
BJ101 D92M-02 CN1
L4 R13 100uF/35V
C18 B16B-PHDSS-B
4
3
4
3
102J (Option) BEADS
2 12,13,14 470uF/35V(ZL)
R1 13 +24V
C4 684J D2 D105
ZR1 R25 3R3-150J SCR101 ZD101
Z0202 L5 R3 1SS270A 14
1
2
1
2
(5W) C102 RD30
R2 C9 104J-474J TF321
C6 Z0202 DB1 104J(1/2W) (Option)
N 103K/250V L101 CR3PM-8
D5SBA60 6.8uH
ENC471-10D 1N4005 222K/AC250V(Y) PQ12RF1
R4 Z0400 R111
104J-474J PQ12RF11 330J
D3 D102 +12V
C7 11
FG ERA22-06 2
4 ERA92-02 Q101 L102
472K/AC250V(Y) IC101
C108 C107
B1136 160uH
SW1-2 R107 R01J R33J(5W) 33uF/25V 1uF/50V
A1451 D108
C19 5 +5V
SDDJE-3 2.2uF/50V ZD3 RD39ESAB1 HSS81 Q102 Z0484 R110
D104 R104 2200uF/10V
C109 6
1SS244 100J(Fuse) A673 R106 1N4005
R16 2401D
RY1-2 K2257 A1175 101J (Option)
104J R112
K2755 R113
SDT-SS-124DM R15 C105 D106 2101D
K2879 R9 C12
4R7J(Fuse) 103K C104 1000uF/35V R105 YG802C04 7 +3.3V
331J(2W) FMB-24L
153J 5 470uF/35V(ZL) 221J
CN3 R103 R109 8
R10 IC102 R114
B04P-XL Q1 330J(Fuse) 392J 181J
C103 PQ3RD23 C106
1 8,9,10
ZD2 1
2 PC1-2 RD20 220uF/25V R125 823J 100uF/16V
ZD1 3
C112 R123 GND
471K/1kV RD16
R11 C111 104K 472J 4
3 HZS15-3
223J 104K 472J 104J
C11 R8 R116
4 R117 R124 15
563J 472J R122 C113
C10 PC817
561J C114
16
680uF/200V R12 471K R126
471K
153J R115 103J
R7 Q2
220J(2W) R118
3 R120 R127
3
333J Q103
2 -I1
561J
10 E2
9 E1
5 CT
6 RT
13 OC
472J 470J /PR

7 GND
C1213A C1213A
3 FBack
12
14 RefOut
C2785 C2785 HL
C14
11
472K R121 IC104 FW
-I2
Vcc
+I1
+I2
123J
DTCon
C2
C1
TL494 9
6 IR9494
4
8
1
15
12
11
16
IR3M02
R119
C13 100J(Fuse)
104K D4
HSS81
1SS244 7
R130
122J C115
R134
PC1-1 104K
R131 393J
PC817 331J
C110
R133
223K 5101F
R132
223J
IC103 VR101
R129
12 – 20
HA17431 5K-ohm
124J
TL431 D107
L5431 1SS270A
R136
R137
1001F
472J
RY1-1 D101
1SS270A
104K/AC250V(X)
SDT-SS-124DM
R23
2 C15 121J(1/4W Fuse) 2
TRC1
TM1641P
PC3
S21ME5Y
R22
C16 104K
121J(1/2W Fuse)
R24
101J(1/4W Fuse)
R101
R20 R102 472J
R17 103J 273J
104J
R108
203J
Q105
PC2
C1213A
R18 R21 C2785
PC817
104J 333J
IC1
R19 HA17431
C17 102K
223J TL431
L5431
1 1
AR-F151
A B C D E
A
ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM 1/5

CN20 CN901
CN22 D-GND 1 1 D-GND
PK
1 LEDPOD DRST 2 2 DRST
LB
AR-F151
POD 2 POD 5V1 3 3 5V

GY
3 D-GND PSW 4 4 PSW
KIN2 5 5 KIN2
CN13 KIN1 6 6 KIN1
PK PK PK
1 LEDPPD2 1 1 LEDPPD2 OP-CLK 7 7 OP-CLK CN902
BL BL BL BR
PPD2 2 PPD2 2 2 PPD2 OP-LATCH 8 8 OP-LATCH OP DRST 1 1 DRST DRST
GY GY GY GY
3 D-GND 3 3 D-GND OP-DATA 9 9 OP-DATA D-GND 3 2 D-GND
PL
4 RTH-IN SELIN10 10 10 SELIN10
PL GY PWB
RTH 1 RTH 1 5 AN-GND SELIN20 11 11 SELIN20
GY
2 AN-GND 2 SELIN30 16 16 SELIN30
D-GND 18 18 D-GND
CN21
1 VFM
VFM 3 /VFMCNT
4 P-GND
CN18 CN27
1 PK
24V 1 24V1 LEDMHPS 1
24V 2 2 24V1 BR MHPS
MHPS 2
MM /MM 5 5 /MM GY
D-GND 3
MMLD 6 6 MMLD
GND 7 7 P-GND
GND 8 8 P-GND
CN30 CN301
D-GND 32 1 D-GND
AN-GND 31 2 AN-GND
CN23 CCDHI 30 3 CCDHI
OR OR
H 5V1(DSWS) 6 2 5V1(DSWS) CCDLO 29 4 CCDLO
GY GY
D-GND 1 3 D-GND A5V 28 5 A5V
PL PL
S /VIDEO 3 5 /VIDEO 5V 27 6 5V
PK PK
Y S/H 2 6 S/H 12V 26 7 12V
GY GY
D-GND 5 7 D-GND D-GND 25 8 D-GND
N LB LB
/LDEN 4 8 /LDEN F1 24 9 F1
C PK
/H SYNC 8 9 LASERCNT D-GND 23 10 D-GND
GY PK
D-GND 7 10 /H SYNC F2 22 11 F2
LSU GY
11 D-GND D-GND 21 12 D-GND
12 D-GND /SH 20 13 /SH
13 P-GND D-GND 19 14 D-GND
BL BL
PMCLK-A 1 14 PMCLK-A RS 18 15 RS CCD
PK PK
PMRDY 2 15 PMRDY D-GND 17 16 D-GND
PL PL
PM /PMD 3 16 /PMD SP 16 17 SP PWB
GY GY
P-GND 4 17 P-GND MCU PWB D-GND 15 18 D-GND
RD RD POWER
24V 5 18 24V CP 14 19 CP
D-GND 13 20 D-GND SUPPLY
BCLK 12 21 BCLK
PWB
D-GND 11 22 D-GND
CCD-D0 10 23 CCD-D0 THERMOSTAT
CN9 CCD-D1 9 24 CCD-D1
1 1 TMa-O BK 1
TM CCD-D2 8 25 CCD-D2 CN3
BK
2 TMb-O CCD-D3 7 26 CCD-D3 HLL 2 1 HLL 1
WH WH HL
CCD-D4 6 27 CCD-D4 HLN 3 2 HLN 2
12 – 21
CN11 CCD-D5 5 28 CCD-D5
RRS 1 24V CCD-D6 4 29 CCD-D6 200V EX ONLY
2 /RRS CCD-D7 3 30 CCD-D7
D-GND 2 31 D-GND
CN7 D-GND 1 32 D-GND
CPFS1 1 24V
2 /CPFS1
1
CN1 2
CED1 BR BR 3
CED1 1 1 CED1 CN17
GY GY 4
D-GND 2 2 D-GND 5V 2
SDA 4
SCL 6
CN14 D-GND 8
PK RD
1 LEDPPD1 24V 1 1 24V 1 DV un
PPD1 PL PL
2 PPD1 TCS 3 2 TCS 2 TCS
GY BR
3 D-GND DVS 5 6 DVS 6
GY
D-GND 7 5 D-GND 5
RD
8 BIAS 8
MULTI BYPASS VERSION ONLY CN12
MPFS 1 24V
2 /MPFS CN10
PK RD RD
3 LEDMFD BIAS MC
BL GY
4 MFD F-GND
GY WH
5 D-GND CN11 GRID
MFD RD
CN6 MCFB
RD
5 24V1
LB
SINGLE BYPASS VERSION ONLY 4 BIAS WH
PL
CN3 1 /MC TC
RD BR
DSW DSW 24V1 1 2 /TC
LB PK RD
BIAS 9 3 GRIDL BC
PL
/MC 11
CN4 BR
/TC 14 THERMOSTAT
RD PK
1 24V GRIDL 13 CN1
RD GY GY BK
2 24V1(DSWS) P-GND 5 15 P-GND CN3
OR GY GY BK
3 5V1(DSWS) P-GND 6 16 P-GND HLL 1 1 HLL 1
OR RD RD WH WH HL
4 5V 24V 7 13 24V HLN 4 2 HLN 2
RD RD
24V 8 14 24V
BL BL
/PSOFF 12 10 /PSOFF 100V EX ONLY
CN25 PL PL
1 P-GND FW 15 9 FW
LB LB POWER
CL 2 P-GND /PR 16 12 /PR
PL PL
3 /CL HLOUT 17 11 HLOUT L
YE YE SUPPLY
4 24V 3.3V 18 7 3.3V
PK PK
12V 19 2 12V GND INLET
YE YE PWB
CN28 3.3V 20 8 3.3V
OR OR
1 24V 5V 21 5 5V N
OR OR
Mirror 2 MRMT-3 5V 22 6 5V
GY GY
3 MRMT-2 D-GND 23 1 D-GND
Motor GY GY
GY GY
A
A
Option
CN15 CN502
5V 1 1 5V
CN501
5V 2 2 5V
Option 5V 3 3 5V /STROBE 1
PARAAD0 4 4 PARAAD0 Data Bit 0 2
CN701 CN16
3.3V 1 1 3.3V PARAAD6 10 10 PARAAD6 Data Bit 6 8
MDATA0 2 2 MDATA0 Personal
MDATA1 3 3 MDATA1 /REV 12 12 /REV /ACK 10
MDATA2 4 4 MDATA2 /INIT 13 13 /INIT BUSY 11 Computer
MDATA3 5 5 MDATA3 /SLCTIN 14 14 /SLCTIN PE 12
MDATA4 6 6 MDATA4 /AUTOFD 15 15 /AUTOFD SLCT 13
MDATA5 7 7 MDATA5 /STB 16 16 /STB /AUTO FD XT 14
MDATA6 8 8 MDATA6 /ACK 17 17 /ACK /ERROR 32
MDATA7 9 9 MDATA7 BUSY 18 18 BUSY /INIT 31
MDATA8 10 10 MDATA8 PE 19 19 PE /SLCT IN 36
MDATA9 11 11 MDATA9 /FAULT 20 20 /FAULT D-GND 33
MDATA10 12 12 MDATA10 SLCT 21 21 SLCT D-GND 19
MDATA11 13 13 MDATA11 /GDI-IN 22 22 /GDI-IN D-GND 21
MDATA12 14 14 MDATA12 D-GND 23 23 D-GND D-GND 23
/OE 18 18 /OE USB-IN 27 27 USB-IN D-GND 30
/WE 19 19 /WE /USB-EN 28 28 /USB-EN
1 D-GND 20 20 D-GND USB-ON 29 29 USB-ON 1
3.3V 21 21 3.3V /1284-EN 30 30 /1284-EN
MAD0 22 22 MAD0 3.3V 31 31 3.3V GDI/USB PWB
12 – 22
MAD1 23 23 MAD1
MAD2 24 24 MAD2
MAD3 25 25 MAD3
GDI
MAD4 26 26 MAD4
MAD5 27 27 MAD5
MAD6 28 28 MAD6
MEMORY MAD7 29 29 MAD7
MAD8 30 30 MAD8
MAD9 31 31 MAD9
PWB MAD10 32 32 MAD10 GDI/USB VERSION ONLY
MAD11 33 33 MAD11
/CAS0 34 34 /CAS0
/CAS1 35 35 /CAS1
/RAS0 36 36 /RAS0
/RAS1 37 37 /RAS1
/RAS2 38 38 /RAS2
/MEMORY 39 39 /MEMORY
D-GND 40 40 D-GND
CN10
PL PL PSW1
PSW1 2 1 PSW1
GY GY
D-GND 3 2 D-GND
GDI VERSION ONLY

MCU
PWB
AR-F151
A
A B C D E

AR-F151
4 4
3 3
CN6
BL BL BL BL
CPFS2 2 /CPFS2 2 14 /CPFS2 1 1 /CPFS2
RD RD RD RD
1 24V 1 13 24V 2 2 24V
OR OR OR
11 5V 4 4 5V
BR BR BR
8 PPD3 7 7 PPD3
GY GY GY
7 D-GND 8 8 D-GND
BR BR BR
6 PSW2 9 11 PSW2
OR GY GY GY
12 – 23
5V 3 4 D-GND 11 12 D-GND
PPD3 BR BR BR BR
PPD3 2 2 CED2 13 13 CED2
GY GY GY GY
D-GND 1 1 D-GND 14 14 D-GND
GY GY
9 FG 6
PSW2 BR
PSW2 1
GY
D-GND 2
MCU PWB
2 2
CED2 1 BR
CED2
2 GY
D-GND
2CS UN FG FG
1 1
A B C D E
A B C D E
FAX SPF UN
4 4
PAPER FEED UNIT

CN26 Senser PWB
GY GY GY
3 D-GND 1 D-GND 5 5 D-GND
PL PL PL
6 SDSW 2 SDSW 4 4 SDSW
BL BL BL
5 SPID 3 SPID 3 3 SPID
LB LB LB
7 SB4D 4 SB4D 2 2 SB4D
OR OR OR
8 5V 5 5V 1 1 5V
RD
11 24V
BR
12 /SPUS
GY
1 D-GND
BR
2 SPPD
PK
4 LEDSPPD
PL
19 SPMT-1
PK
20 SPMT-3
BL
21 SPMT-2
BR
3 22 SPMT-0 3
RD
23 24Vmir
RD
24 24Vmir
RD BL
2 24V 1
BR BL
1 /SPUS 2 SPUS
12 – 24
GY
2
BR
3 SPPD
PK
FG 1
FG
MCU PWB PL
3 SPMT-1(B)
2 PK 2
1 SPMT-3(/B)
BL
6 SPMT-2(/A)
BR SPMT
4 SPMT-0(A)
RD
2 24Vmir
RD
5 24Vmir
1 CN31 1
PK
1 LEDSDOD
BL
2 SDOD SDOD
GY
3 D-GND
AR-F151
A B C D E
A B C D E

AR-F151
4 4
FAX-SPF UN
CN5 CN601
D-GND 1 1 D-GND
D-GND 2 2 D-GND
/SCLINE 3 3 /SCLINE
D-GND 4 4 D-GND
/PREADY 5 5 NC
FTXD 6 6 FTXD
/FRTS 7 7 /FRTS
D-GND 8 8 D-GND FG
D-GND 9 9 D-GND
D-GND 10 10 D-GND
D-GND 11 11 D-GND
F-RESET 12 12 /RESET
/HSYNK 13 13 /HSYNK
OUTD1 14 14 OUTD1
OUTD3 15 15 OUTD3
OUTD5 16 16 OUTD5
OUTD7 17 17 OUTD7
3 OUTD9 18 18 OUTD9 FAX-OP PWB 3
OUTD11 19 19 OUTD11 CN701
OUTD13 20 20 OUTD13 CN501
9 F-GND
OUTD15 21 21 OUTD15 PK PK PK PK
A12V 1 1 A12V 1 1 A12V
/PCLREQ 22 22 NC OR OR OR OR
VCC 2 2 VCC 2 2 5V
/PCLCS 23 23 NC BL BL BL BL
SOD 3 3 SOD 3 3 SOD
/FAXREQ 24 24 /SCDSET PL PL PL PL
SID 4 4 SID 4 4 SID
/FAXCS 25 25 /SCDBCS LB LB LB LB
SCK 5 5 SCK 5 5 SCK
D-GND 26 26 D-GND BR BR BR BR
RESET 6 6 RESET 6 6 RESET
5V 27 27 5V GY GY GY GY
3.3V 28 28 3.3V GY GY GY GY
D-GND 29 29 D-GND BL
BZ1 7
D-GND 30 30 D-GND BL
BZ2 8
D-GND 31 31 D-GND
D-GND 32 32 D-GND
/PRLINE 33 33 /PRLINE
/FPAGE 34 34 /FPAGE
/FREADY 35 35 D-GND
/READY 36 36 /READY
BL BL
FRXD 37 37 FRXD 1 BZ1 1
BL BL SPEAKER
/FCTS 38 38 /FCTS 2 BZ2 2
MCU D-GND 39 39 D-GND FAX
D-GND 40 40 D-GND
12 – 25
D-GND 41 41 D-GND
PWB D-GND 42 42 D-GND PWB
/POFF 43 43 /PWOFF
OUTD0 44 44 OUTD0
OUTD2 45 45 OUTD2
OUTD4 46 46 OUTD4
OUTD6 47 47 OUTD6
OUTD8 48 48 OUTD8
OUTD10 49 49 OUTD10
OUTD12 50 50 OUTD12
OUTD14 51 51 OUTD14
/PCLPRD 52 52 NC
/PCLACK 53 53 NC
/FAXPRD 54 54 /FAXPRD
/FAXACK 55 55 /SCDACK
12V 56 56 12V
2 5V 57 57 5V 2
3.3V 58 58 3.3V
D-GND 59 59 D-GND
D-GND 60 60 D-GND
CN503
A12V 1
A12V 2
VCC 3
VCC 4
-A12V 5
-A12V 6
-5V 7
H VOL0 8
H VOL1 9
H VOL2 10
HS OFFHK 11
HS EN 12
ASIG 13
ASIGN 14
D-GND 15
1 D-GND 16 1
A B C D E
AR-F151
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish) ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
AR-F151
COPYRIGHT © 1999 BY SHARP CORPORATION

All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise,
without prior written permission of the publisher.
SHARP CORPORATION
Digital Document Systems Group
Quality & Reliability Control Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
1999 August Printed in Japan N

AR150 Service

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

AR150 Service

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AR-F151

[ 4 ] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES . . . 4 - 1

[ 5 ] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1

[ 7 ] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1

[ 9 ] SIMULATION, FAX SOFTWARE SWITCH,

[10] USER PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1

[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1

[12] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1

This document has been published to be used

At the production line, the output power Caution

VAROITUS! LAITTEEN KÄYTTÄMINEN MUULLA

VARNING - OM APPARATEN ANVÄNDS PÅ ANNAT

AR-150 15CPM MB Opt ∗1 Opt ∗1 Opt Opt

(AR-150) (AR-F151) (AR-155)

∗1: OHP, Label, Postal card: each 1 pc.

Section Item Details Spec.

Writing Writing system Writing to OPC drum by the semiconductor laser

Section Item Details Spec.

2. Basic specifications of facsimile (AR-F151 only)

Large Item Middle Item Small Item Sub Item Spec.

Transmission SPF/OC transmission

Large Item Middle Item Small Item Sub Item Spec.

Boadcast Number of relay

Large Item Middle Item Small Item Sub Item Spec.

Large Item Middle Item Small Item Sub Item Spec.

Speed dialing Number of other

Large Item Middle Item Small Item Sub Item Spec.

Large Item Middle Item Small Item Sub Item Spec.

Large Item Middle Item Small Item Sub Item Spec.

Large Item Middle Item Small Item Sub Item Spec.

[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS

∗1: For USA government

B. Europe / East Europe / Australia / Newzealand / Latin America (SEC)

D. Hong Kong / China

F. Asia (Agent) – Except Taiwan

2. Environmental 3. Production control number(lot No.)

10˚C 30˚C 35˚C

15% 〈JAPAN production〉

–25˚C 30˚C 40˚C Ver.A 9 1 1 0001 X

∗1 The production control label is not attached to the cartridge of a

4. Consumable parts refill procedure

Check for breakage of molt and suede.

DV molt F DV molt DV molt R

Side sheet F Side sheet R

6) Clean the DV box unit by sucking or blowing with a vacuum cleaner

15) Install the DVF cover to the DV-TH box unit.

Note for MG cover installation

Put a white mark on the above position.

[The reattachment procedure]

DV box unit F side DV box unit R side

.Remove glue completely before reattaching.

.Do not allow clearance between DV molt and DV molt F.

.Remove glue completely before reattaching.

When attaching the DV molt F, When attaching the DV molt R,

2) Remove the drum cover. (4 Lock Tabs)

6) Remove the cleaning blade.

10) Attach the felt.

14) Attach the drum cover.

Note: Another method of cleaning the drum counter is avail-

[4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES

1 Operation panel 2 Original table 3 SPF exit area ∗1

1 TD cartridge lock release button 2 TD cartridge 3 Drum cartridge

4. A Look at the Operation Panel (AR-F151 only)